Nikon Camcorder D2HS User Manual

En  
The Nikon Guide to Digital Photography  
with the  
DIGITAL CAMERA  
How to Read This Manual  
First, be aware of the warnings, cautions, and notices on pages ii–vii.  
Overview  
Then read “Overview” and “Getting to Know the  
Camera” to acquaint yourself with the conventions  
used in this manual and the names of camera parts,  
then set up the camera as described in “First Steps.”  
Getting to Know the Camera  
First Steps  
Basic Photography  
Basic Playback  
Now you are ready to take photographs and play  
them back.  
Choosing a Shooting Mode  
Image Quality and Size  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)  
White Balance  
Image Adjustment  
Focus  
Once you have mastered the basics of digital pho-  
tography, you can read these sections for complete  
information on when and how to use camera  
controls.  
Exposure  
Flash Photography  
Interval Timer Photography  
Self-Timer Mode  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Using a GPS Unit  
Two-Button Reset  
More About Playback  
Voice Memos  
Refer to these chapters for more on playback…  
…on recording and playing voice memos…  
…on camera menus and custom settings…  
…on connecting to a computer, printer, or TV…  
…and on accessories and troubleshooting.  
Menu Guide  
Connections  
Technical Notes  
i
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others,  
read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equip-  
ment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product  
will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions  
listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings, information that should be read before using this  
Nikon product to prevent possible injury.  
WARNINGS  
Do not look at the sun through the view-  
finder  
Do not disassemble  
Touching the products internal parts  
could result in injury. In the event of  
a malfunction, the product should be  
repaired only by a qualified technician.  
Should the product break open as the  
result of a fall or other accident, remove  
the battery and/or AC adapter and then  
take the product to a Nikon-authorized  
service center for inspection.  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
Turn off immediately in the event of  
malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an unusual  
smell coming from the equipment or  
from the AC adapter (available sep-  
arately), unplug the AC adapter and  
remove the battery immediately, tak-  
ing care to avoid burns. Continued  
operation could result in injury. After  
removing the battery, take the equipment  
to a Nikon-authorized service center for  
inspection.  
Observe proper precautions when han-  
dling batteries  
Batteries may leak or explode if im-  
properly handled. Observe the following  
precautions when handling batteries for  
use in this product:  
• Be sure the product is off before replacing  
batteries. If you are using an AC adapter,  
be sure it is unplugged.  
• Use only batteries approved for use in  
this equipment.  
• Use only CR1616 lithium batteries to re-  
place the clock battery. Using another  
type of battery could cause an explosion.  
Dispose of used batteries as directed.  
• Do not attempt to insert batteries upside  
down or backwards.  
• Do not short or disassemble batteries.  
• Do not expose batteries to flame or to  
excessive heat.  
Do not use in the presence of flam-  
mable gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in the  
presence of flammable gas, as this could  
result in explosion or fire.  
Do not place strap around the neck of  
an infant or child  
Placing the camera strap around the  
neck of an infant or child could result  
in strangulation.  
ii  
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.  
• Batteries are prone to leakage when  
fully discharged. To avoid damage to  
the product, be sure to remove batteries  
when no charge remains.  
Removing memory cards  
Memory cards may become hot dur-  
ing use. Observe due caution when  
removing memory cards from the  
camera.  
• Discontinue use immediately should you  
notice any changes in the batteries, such  
as discoloration or deformation.  
• Replace the terminal cover when trans-  
porting EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion  
batteries. Do not transport or store  
with metal objects such as necklaces or  
hairpins.  
• When EN-EL4 batteries are not in use,  
attach the terminal cover and store in a  
cool place.  
• Immediately after use, or when the  
product is used on battery power for  
an extended period, the EN-EL4 battery  
may become hot. Before removing the  
battery, turn the camera off and allow  
the battery to cool.  
CD-ROMs  
The CD-ROMs on which the software  
and manuals are distributed should not  
be played back on audio CD equipment.  
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD player  
could cause hearing loss or damage the  
equipment.  
Observe caution when using a flash  
Using a flash close to your subjects eyes  
could cause temporary visual impairment.  
Particular care should be observed if  
photographing infants, when the flash  
should be no less than one meter (39˝)  
from the subject.  
When using the viewfinder  
When operating the diopter adjustment  
control with your eye to the viewfinder,  
care should be taken not to put your  
finger in your eye accidentally.  
Use appropriate cables  
When connecting cables to the input and  
output jacks, use only the cables pro-  
vided or sold by Nikon for the purpose,  
to maintain compliance with product  
regulations.  
Avoid contact with liquid crystal  
Should the monitor break, care should  
be taken to avoid injury due to broken  
glass and to prevent liquid crystal from  
the monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes or mouth.  
Keep out of reach of children  
Particular care should be taken to prevent  
infants from putting the battery or other  
small parts into their mouths.  
iii  
Caring for the Camera and Battery  
Do not drop  
Handle all moving parts with care  
The product may malfunction if subjected to Do not apply force to the battery-chamber,  
strong shocks or vibration.  
card-slot, or connector covers. These parts  
are especially susceptible to damage.  
Keep dry  
This product is not waterproof, and may Cleaning  
malfunction if immersed in water or exposed • When cleaning the camera body, use a  
to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the  
internal mechanism can cause irreparable  
damage.  
blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe  
gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using  
your camera at the beach or seaside, wipe  
off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly  
dampened with pure water and then dry  
your camera thoroughly. In rare instances,  
static electricity produced by a brush or  
cloth may cause the LCD displays to light  
up or darken. This does not indicate a  
malfunction, and the display will shortly  
return to normal.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature  
Sudden changes in temperature, such as oc-  
cur when entering or leaving a heated build-  
ing on a cold day, can cause condensation  
inside the device. To prevent condensation,  
place the device in a carrying case or a plastic  
bag before exposing it to sudden changes in  
temperature.  
• When cleaning the lens and mirror, re-  
member that these elements are easily  
damaged. Dust and lint should be gently  
removed with a blower. When using an  
aerosol blower, keep the can vertical (tilt-  
ing the can could result in liquid being  
sprayed on the mirror). If you do get a  
fingerprint or other stain on the lens, ap-  
ply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft  
cloth and wipe the lens carefully.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields  
Do not use or store this device in the vicinity  
of equipment that generates strong elec-  
tromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields.  
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields  
produced by equipment such as radio trans-  
mitters could interfere with the monitor,  
damage data stored on the memory card, or  
affect the products internal circuitry.  
• See Technical Notes: Caring for Your  
Camera” for information on cleaning the  
low-pass filter ( 244).  
Do not point the lens at strong light sources  
for extended periods  
Avoid pointing the lens at the sun or other  
strong light sources for extended periods Storage  
when using or storing the camera. Intense • To prevent mold or mildew, store the cam-  
light may cause deterioration in the image  
sensor, producing a white blur effect in  
photographs.  
era in a dry, well-ventilated area. If you  
will not be using the product for long pe-  
riods, remove the battery to prevent leak-  
age and store the camera in a plastic bag  
containing a desiccant. Do not, however,  
store the camera case in a plastic bag, as  
this may cause the material to deteriorate.  
Note that desiccant gradually loses its ca-  
pacity to absorb moisture and should be  
replaced at regular intervals.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain  
The shutter curtain is extremely thin and  
easily damaged. Under no circumstances  
should you exert pressure on the curtain,  
poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to  
powerful air currents from a blower. These  
actions could scratch, deform, or tear the  
curtain.  
iv  
• Do not store the camera with naphtha or circumstances could result in loss of data or  
camphor moth balls, close to equipment in damage to product memory or internal  
that produces strong magnetic fields, or in circuitry. To prevent an accidental inter-  
areas subject to extremes of temperature, ruption of power, avoid carrying the product  
for example near a space heater or in a from one location to another while the AC  
closed vehicle on a hot day.  
adapter is connected.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the cam-  
era out of storage at least once a month.  
Turn the camera on and release the shut-  
ter a few times before putting the camera  
away again.  
• Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Re-  
place the terminal cover before putting  
the battery away.  
Batteries  
• When you turn the device on, check the  
battery-level displayed in the control panel  
to determine whether the battery needs  
to be replaced. The battery needs to be  
replaced when the battery-level indicator  
is flashing.  
• Ready a spare battery and keep it fully  
charged when taking photographs on im-  
portant occasions. Depending on your lo-  
cation, you may find it difficult to purchase  
replacement batteries on short notice.  
Notes on the monitor  
• The monitor may contain a few pixels that  
are always lit or that do not light. This is  
a characteristic common to all TFT LCD  
monitors and does not indicate a malfunc- • On cold days, the capacity of batteries  
tion. Images recorded with the product  
will not be affected.  
• Images in the monitor may be difficult to  
see in a bright light.  
• Do not apply pressure to the monitor; this  
could cause damage or malfunction. Dust  
tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is  
fully charged before taking photographs  
outside in cold weather. Keep a spare  
battery in a warm place and exchange the  
two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold  
battery may recover some of its charge.  
or lint on the monitor can be removed • Should the battery terminals become dirty,  
with a blower. Stains can be removed  
by rubbing the surface lightly with a soft  
cloth or chamois leather.  
• Should the monitor break, care should be  
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass  
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or entering the  
eyes or mouth.  
wipe them off with a clean, dry cloth be-  
fore use.  
• After removing the battery from the cam-  
era, be sure to replace the terminal cover.  
Memory cards  
Turn the power off before inserting or  
removing memory cards. Inserting or  
removing cards with the power on could  
render them unusable.  
• Insert memory cards as  
shown in the illustration  
• Replace the monitor cover when trans-  
porting the camera or leaving it unat-  
tended.  
Turn the product off before removing or dis-  
connecting the power source  
at right. Inserting cards  
upside down or back-  
Do not unplug the product or remove the  
battery while the product is on, or while  
images are being recorded or deleted. Forc-  
ibly cutting power to the product in these  
wards could damage the  
camera or the card.  
v
Notices  
• No part of the manuals included with • Nikon will not be held liable for any  
this product may be reproduced, trans-  
mitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval  
damages resulting from the use of this  
product.  
system, or translated into any language • While every effort has been made to  
in any form, by any means, without  
Nikons prior written permission.  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the  
specifications of the hardware and soft-  
ware described in these manuals at any  
time and without prior notice.  
ensure that the information in these  
manuals is accurate and complete, we  
would appreciate it were you to bring  
any errors or omissions to the attention  
of the Nikon representative in your area  
(address provided separately).  
Notice for customers in the U.S.A.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found  
to comply with the limits for a Class B digi-  
tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC  
rules. These limits are designed to provide  
D2Hs  
Tested To Comply  
With FCC Standards  
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interfer-  
ence to radio communications. However,  
there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful in-  
terference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encour-  
aged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
The FCC requires the user to be notified  
that any changes or modifications made to  
this device that are not expressly approved  
by Nikon Corporation may void the users  
authority to operate the equipment.  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or provided  
by Nikon for your equipment. Using other  
interface cables may exceed the limits of  
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Notice for customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this  
product will expose you to lead, a chemi-  
cal known to the State of California to  
cause birth defects or other reproductive  
harm. Wash hands after handling.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving an-  
tenna.  
• Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet  
on a circuit different from that to which  
the receiver is connected.  
Nikon Inc.,  
1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York  
11747-3064, U.S.A. Tel.: 631-547-4200  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
vi  
Notice for customers in Canada  
CAUTION  
ATTENTION  
This class B digital apparatus meets all re- Cet appareil numérique de la classe B res-  
quirements of the Canadian Interference pecte toutes les exigences du Règlement  
Causing Equipment Regulations.  
sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced  
by means of a scanner, digital camera or other device may be punishable by law.  
• Items prohibited by law from being • Cautions on certain copies and re-  
copied or reproduced  
productions  
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,  
coins, securities, government bonds, or  
local government bonds, even if such  
copies or reproductions are stamped  
“Sample.”  
The government has issued cautions on  
copies or reproductions of securities is-  
sued by private companies (shares, bills,  
checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter  
passes, or coupon tickets, except when  
a minimum of necessary copies are to be  
provided for business use by a company.  
Also, do not copy or reproduce pass-  
ports issued by the government, licenses  
issued by public agencies and private  
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as  
passes and meal coupons.  
The copying or reproduction of paper  
money, coins, or securities which are  
circulated in a foreign country is pro-  
hibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the  
copying or reproduction of unused post-  
age stamps or post cards issued by the  
government is prohibited.  
• Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of copy-  
righted creative works such as books,  
music, paintings, woodcut prints, maps,  
drawings, movies, and photographs is  
governed by national and international  
copyright laws. Do not use this product  
for the purpose of making illegal copies  
or to infringe copyright laws.  
The copying or reproduction of stamps  
issued by the government and of cer-  
tified documents stipulated by law is  
prohibited.  
Trademark Information  
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Microsoft  
and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation.  
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. Microdrive is a registered trademark of Hitachi Global Storage  
Technologies in the United States and/or other countries. Lexar Media is a trademark of Lexar Media Corporation.  
PictBridge is a trademark. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with  
your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
vii  
Table of Contents  
For Your Safety................................................................................................ ii  
Caring for the Camera and Battery................................................................ iv  
Notices.............................................................................................................. vi  
Introduction  
1
2
3
Overview..........................................................................................................  
Getting to Know the Camera .........................................................................  
First Steps......................................................................................................... 15  
Step 1—Attach the Camera Strap .................................................................... 15  
Step 2—Insert the Battery ................................................................................ 16  
Step 3—Basic Setup ......................................................................................... 17  
Step 4—Attach a Lens...................................................................................... 20  
Step 5—Insert a Memory Card ......................................................................... 22  
Tutorial  
25  
Basic Photography........................................................................................... 26  
Step 1—Ready the Camera .............................................................................. 27  
Step 2—Adjust Camera Settings....................................................................... 29  
Step 3—Frame a Photograph ........................................................................... 31  
Step 4—Focus.................................................................................................. 32  
Step 5—Check Exposure .................................................................................. 33  
Step 6—Take the Photograph........................................................................... 34  
Basic Playback.................................................................................................. 35  
Taking Photographs  
37  
Using Camera Menus ...................................................................................... 39  
Choosing a Shooting Mode ............................................................................ 41  
Image Quality and Size ................................................................................... 43  
Image Quality................................................................................................... 43  
Image Size........................................................................................................ 46  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency) ........................................................................... 50  
White Balance.................................................................................................. 52  
Fine-Tuning White Balance ............................................................................... 54  
Choosing a Color Temperature......................................................................... 56  
Preset White Balance........................................................................................ 57  
Image Adjustment........................................................................................... 65  
Making Edges More Distinct: Image Sharpening............................................... 65  
Adjusting Contrast: Tone Compensation........................................................... 66  
Suiting Colors to a Workflow: Color Mode ....................................................... 67  
Controlling Color: Hue Adjustment .................................................................. 69  
Focus................................................................................................................. 70  
Focus Mode ..................................................................................................... 70  
Focus Area Selection ........................................................................................ 72  
viii  
Autofocus ........................................................................................................ 74  
AF-Area Mode.............................................................................................. 74  
Focus Lock.................................................................................................... 78  
Getting Good Results with Autofocus........................................................... 80  
Manual Focus................................................................................................... 81  
Exposure........................................................................................................... 82  
Metering.......................................................................................................... 82  
Exposure Mode ................................................................................................ 83  
Autoexposure Lock........................................................................................... 93  
Exposure Compensation................................................................................... 95  
Bracketing........................................................................................................ 96  
Flash Photography........................................................................................... 104  
TTL Flash Control.............................................................................................. 105  
Compatible Speedlights.................................................................................... 107  
Flash Sync Modes............................................................................................. 110  
FV Lock ............................................................................................................ 112  
Flash Contacts and Indicators ........................................................................... 114  
Interval Timer Photography............................................................................ 115  
Self-Timer Mode.............................................................................................. 120  
Non-CPU Lenses............................................................................................... 121  
Using a GPS Unit.............................................................................................. 125  
Two-Button Reset............................................................................................ 126  
More About Playback  
127  
Single-Image Playback...................................................................................... 128  
Photo Information............................................................................................ 129  
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback.................................................. 132  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ............................................................... 134  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion.............................................................. 135  
Deleting Individual Photographs ....................................................................... 136  
Voice Memos  
137  
Recording Voice Memos................................................................................... 138  
Playing Voice Memos........................................................................................ 142  
ix  
Menu Guide  
145  
The Playback Menu ......................................................................................... 146  
Delete .............................................................................................................. 146  
Playback Folder ................................................................................................ 148  
Slide Show ....................................................................................................... 149  
Hide Image....................................................................................................... 151  
Print Set ........................................................................................................... 153  
Display Mode ................................................................................................... 156  
Image Review................................................................................................... 156  
After Delete ..................................................................................................... 157  
Rotate Tall ........................................................................................................ 157  
The Shooting Menu......................................................................................... 158  
Shooting Menu Bank........................................................................................ 159  
Reset Shooting Menu....................................................................................... 161  
Active Folder .................................................................................................... 162  
File Naming...................................................................................................... 163  
Image Quality................................................................................................... 163  
Image Size........................................................................................................ 164  
JPEG Compression............................................................................................ 164  
Raw Compression ............................................................................................ 164  
White Balance.................................................................................................. 164  
Long Exp. NR.................................................................................................... 165  
High ISO NR ..................................................................................................... 165  
ISO................................................................................................................... 166  
Image Sharpening ............................................................................................ 166  
Tone Compensation ......................................................................................... 166  
Color Mode...................................................................................................... 166  
Hue Adjustment............................................................................................... 167  
Interval Timer Shooting .................................................................................... 167  
Non-CPU Lens Data.......................................................................................... 167  
Custom Settings............................................................................................... 168  
The Setup Menu .............................................................................................. 201  
Format ............................................................................................................. 202  
LCD Brightness................................................................................................. 203  
Mirror Lock-up ................................................................................................. 203  
Video Mode..................................................................................................... 204  
World Time...................................................................................................... 204  
Language......................................................................................................... 204  
Image Comment .............................................................................................. 205  
Auto Image Rotation........................................................................................ 206  
Voice Memo..................................................................................................... 207  
x
Voice Memo Overwrite..................................................................................... 207  
Voice Memo Button ......................................................................................... 207  
Audio Output................................................................................................... 207  
USB.................................................................................................................. 208  
Dust Off Ref Photo........................................................................................... 209  
Battery Info ...................................................................................................... 211  
Wireless LAN.................................................................................................... 211  
Firmware Version.............................................................................................. 219  
Connections  
221  
Television Playback.......................................................................................... 222  
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................................. 223  
Connecting to a Printer................................................................................... 226  
Technical Notes  
231  
Optional Accessories ....................................................................................... 232  
Lenses for the D2Hs ......................................................................................... 232  
Other Accessories............................................................................................. 235  
Caring for the Camera .................................................................................... 241  
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 246  
Specifications................................................................................................... 249  
Index................................................................................................................. 254  
xi  
xii  
Introduction  
Getting Started  
This chapter is divided into the following sec-  
tions:  
Overview  
Read this section for a description of how this  
manual is organized and for an explanation of  
the symbols and conventions used.  
Getting to Know the Camera  
Bookmark this section and refer to it for infor-  
mation on the names and functions of camera  
parts.  
First Steps  
This section details the steps required to ready  
the camera for use: inserting the battery and  
memory card, attaching a lens and camera strap,  
and setting the date, time, and language.  
1
Overview  
About This Manual  
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon D2Hs single-lens reflex (SLR) digital  
camera with interchangeable lenses. This manual has been written to help  
you enjoy taking pictures with your Nikon digital camera. Read this manual  
thoroughly before use, and keep it handy when using the product.  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols  
and conventions are used:  
This icon marks cautions, informa-  
tion that should be read before use  
to prevent damage to the camera.  
This icon marks tips, additional in-  
formation that may be helpful when  
using the camera.  
This icon marks notes, information  
that should be read before using  
the camera.  
This icon indicates that more infor-  
mation is available elsewhere in this  
manual or in the Quick Start Guide.  
This icon marks settings that can be  
fine-tuned from the Custom Set-  
tings menu.  
This icon marks settings that can be  
adjusted using camera menus.  
Take Test Shots  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (for example, at weddings or before  
taking the camera with you on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is  
functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may  
result from product malfunction.  
Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikons Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and  
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:  
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
• For users in Europe: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support  
• For users in Asia, Oceania, the Middle East, and Africa: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers  
to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and pho-  
tography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in  
your area. See the URL below for contact information:  
http://nikonimaging.com/  
Replacing This Manual  
Should you lose this manual, replacements can be ordered, for a fee, from any autho-  
rized Nikon service representative.  
2
Getting to Know the Camera  
Camera Controls and Displays  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and dis-  
plays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you  
read through the rest of the manual.  
Camera Body  
Metering selector:  
Metering selector  
lock button: 82  
Exposure mode (  
82  
) button:  
) button: 21  
83  
Format (  
Bracketing (  
)
button: 96, 101  
Mode dial lock  
Power switch:  
Shutter-release  
button: 32, 34  
Exposure  
compensation  
) button:  
95  
27  
release:  
42  
Mode dial:  
42  
Eyelet for  
camera  
strap:  
(
15  
Eyelet for  
camera  
strap:  
Flash sync  
mode (  
button:  
)
15  
111  
Top control  
panel:  
Diopter  
adjustment  
knob:  
6
Accessory shoe:  
114  
Command lock (  
button: 92  
)
31  
Focal plane mark  
): 81  
(
LCD Illuminators  
Holding the power switch in the  
position activates the exposure meters and control  
panel backlights (LCD illuminators), allowing the display to be read in the dark. After  
the power switch is released, the illuminator will remain lit while the camera exposure  
meters are active or until the shutter is released.  
3
Ambient light sensor:  
52, 57  
Camera Body (continued)  
Self-timer lamp:  
120  
Flash sync terminal:  
114  
10-pin remote terminal:  
239  
Audio/video (A/V) connector  
(under cover): 222  
Housings for flash  
sync and 10-pin re-  
mote terminal caps  
(on inside of cover)  
DC-in connector  
(under cover):  
235  
USB connector (under cover):  
224  
Lens release button:  
Focus-mode selector:  
Battery cover latch:  
21  
70  
16  
Connector for  
optional WT-2/  
2A or WT-1/1A  
wireless LAN  
Depth-of-field preview button:  
83  
adapter (under  
cover):  
235  
Sub-command dial:  
12  
FUNC. button:  
197  
Sub-command  
dial for vertical  
shooting:  
12  
Shutter-release  
button for vertical  
shooting:  
31  
Vertical shooting shutter-  
Tripod socket  
release button lock:  
31, 71  
4
Eyepiece shutter lever:  
31, 120  
Viewfinder eyepiece:  
31, 236  
AF-ON ( )button:  
71  
Delete ( ) button:  
35, 136  
23  
AE/AF lock (  
button: 78, 93  
)
Format (  
) button:  
Main command  
dial: 12  
Playback (  
button:  
)
128  
28,  
Multi selector:  
14  
Monitor:  
203, 241  
Focus selector  
Menu (  
button:  
)
lock:  
72  
39  
Memory card  
access lamp:  
22, 24  
Thumbnail (  
button:  
)
132  
AF-area mode  
selector: 74  
Protect (  
button:  
)
135  
HELP button:  
39  
Memory card  
slot cover:  
22  
Enter (  
button:  
)
40  
Playback zoom  
Card-slot cover  
release button  
(under cover):  
22  
( ) button:  
134  
Speaker:  
143  
Rear control panel:  
button:  
9
Main command dial  
for vertical shooting:  
12  
Sensitivity (ISO)  
50  
Image quality/size (QUAL)  
AF-ON ( ) button for vertical  
shooting: 71  
Microphone ( ) button:  
button:  
44, 47  
White balance (WB)  
138  
button:  
52–64  
Microphone: 138  
The Speaker and Microphone  
Do not bring magnetic devices, such as microdrive cards, close to the built-in speaker  
or microphone.  
5
The Top Control Panel  
1
2
3
9
10  
4
5
6
11  
7
8
12  
13  
19  
14  
15  
20  
21  
16  
17  
22  
23  
18  
6
1 Shutter speed ..........................83–92  
Exposure compensation value....... 95  
Number of shots in bracketing  
sequence...................................... 96  
Number of intervals for  
interval timer photography ......... 117  
Focal length (non-CPU lens)........ 121  
Sensitivity (ISO equivalency) .......... 50  
2 Shutter-speed lock icon................. 92  
3 Flexible program indicator............. 85  
4 Exposure mode............................. 83  
5 Memory card indicator............ 23, 28  
6 Focus area .................................... 72  
AF-area mode..........................74–77  
7 Flash sync mode ......................... 110  
8 Number of exposures  
14 FV lock indicator......................... 112  
15 Sync indicator............................. 111  
16 Clock battery indicator.......... 19, 243  
17 GPS connection indicator............ 125  
18 Exposure compensation indicator.. 95  
19 Interval timer indicator................ 117  
20 Aperture lock icon ........................ 92  
21 Image comment indicator........... 205  
22 Exposure bracketing indicator....... 96  
White-balance bracketing  
indicator..................................... 101  
23 Electronic analog exposure  
display.......................................... 91  
Exposure compensation................ 95  
Bracketing progress  
indicator................................96–103  
PC mode indicator...................... 224  
remaining..................................... 28  
Number of shots remaining  
before memory buffer fills............. 42  
Capture mode indicator.............. 224  
9 Aperture stop indicator........... 89, 91  
10 Aperture (f/-number) ...............83–92  
Aperture (number of stops)..... 89, 91  
Bracketing increment............ 97, 101  
Number of shots per interval....... 117  
Maximum aperture  
(non-CPU lens)............................ 122  
PC mode indicator...................... 224  
11 Battery indicator ........................... 27  
12 Frame count ................................. 28  
13 “K” (appears when memory remains  
for over 1000 exposures) .............. 49  
7
The Rear Control Panel  
1
2
3
8
9
10  
11  
12  
4
13  
5
6
7
8
1 Custom settings bank................. 171  
2 “Remaining” indicator.................. 28  
3 Shooting menu settings bank ..... 159  
4 Sensitivity (ISO) indicator............... 50  
Auto sensitivity indicator............. 180  
5 Sensitivity ..................................... 50  
Sensitivity (high gain).................... 50  
Number of exposures  
remaining..................................... 28  
Length of voice memo................ 139  
White balance fine-tuning ............ 54  
White balance preset number....... 57  
Color temperature........................ 56  
PC mode indicator...................... 224  
6 “K” (appears when memory remains  
for over 1000 exposures) .............. 49  
Color temperature indicator.......... 56  
7 Image quality................................ 43  
8 Image size .................................... 46  
9 White-balance bracketing  
indicator..................................... 101  
10 Voice memo recording indicator  
(shooting mode) ......................... 140  
11 Voice memo status indicator....... 139  
12 Voice memo recording mode ...... 138  
13 White balance mode..................... 52  
9
The Viewfinder Display  
1
21  
22  
2
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
20  
12  
13 14  
15  
16 17 18  
19  
10  
1 8-mm (0.31˝) reference circle for  
center-weighted metering............. 82  
2 Focus brackets (focus areas).......... 72  
Spot metering targets................... 82  
3 Focus indicator ....................... 32, 81  
4 Metering ...................................... 82  
5 Bracketing indicator...................... 96  
6 Autoexposure (AE) lock................. 93  
7 Shutter-speed lock icon................. 92  
8 Shutter speed ..........................83–92  
9 Aperture lock icon ........................ 92  
10 Aperture (f/-number) ...............83–92  
Aperture (number of stops)..... 89, 91  
11 Exposure mode............................. 83  
12 Exposure compensation indicator.. 95  
13 Frame count ................................. 28  
Number of exposures  
14 “K” (appears when memory remains  
for over 1000 exposures) .............. 49  
15 Flash-ready indicator................... 114  
16 Battery indicator ........................... 27  
17 FV lock indicator......................... 112  
18 Sync indicator............................. 111  
19 Aperture stop indicator........... 89, 91  
20 Electronic analog exposure  
display.......................................... 91  
Exposure compensation................ 95  
21 Voice memo status indicator....... 139  
22 White-balance bracketing  
indicator..................................... 101  
23 White-balance mode .................... 49  
24 Image size .................................... 46  
25 Image quality................................ 43  
26 Sensitivity (ISO) indicator............... 50  
Auto sensitivity indicator............. 180  
27 Sensitivity (ISO equivalency) .......... 50  
remaining..................................... 28  
Number of shots remaining  
before memory buffer fills............. 42  
Exposure compensation value....... 95  
PC mode indicator...................... 224  
11  
The Command Dials  
The main- and sub-command dials are used alone or in combination with  
other controls to adjust a variety of settings. For ease of access when taking  
photographs in tall (portrait) orientation, dials that duplicate the functions  
of the main and sub-command dials have been placed close to the shutter-  
release button for vertical shooting ( 31).  
Image  
quality/size  
button  
Sub-command dial  
Bracketing  
button  
Exposure  
mode button  
Exposure  
compensation  
button  
Flash sync  
mode button  
Command  
lock button  
Sensitivity White  
button balance  
button  
Main command dial  
Image quality and size  
Set image quality ( 43).  
Choose an image size ( 46).  
White balance  
Choose a white balance setting ( 52).  
Fine-tune white balance/choose a color  
temperature/choose a white balance preset  
(
53, 56, 57).  
Sensitivity (ISO equivalency)  
Set sensitivity (ISO equivalency;  
50).  
12  
Exposure  
Choose the exposure mode ( 83–91).  
Choose a combination of aperture and  
shutter speed (exposure mode P;  
85).  
Choose a shutter speed (exposure mode S  
or M; 86, 90).  
Choose an aperture (exposure mode A or  
M; 88, 90).  
Set exposure compensation ( 95).  
Shutter speed lock (exposure mode S or  
M;  
92).  
Aperture lock (exposure mode A or M;  
92).  
Activate or cancel bracketing/select num-  
ber of shots in bracketing sequence (  
96, 101).  
Select bracketing exposure increment (  
97, 101).  
Flash settings  
Choose a flash sync mode for optional  
Speedlight ( 110).  
13  
The Multi Selector  
The multi selector is used for the following operations:  
Menu navigation: Move highlight bar up ( 40).  
Help: Scroll up ( 39).  
Shooting: Select focus area above current focus  
area ( 72).  
Full-frame playback: Display previous image (  
35).  
Thumbnail playback: Highlight thumbnail above  
Menu navigation: Select  
highlighted item ( 40).  
Shooting: Select center focus  
area ( 72).  
Playback: Change number of  
images displayed ( 132).  
current thumbnail ( 132).  
Menu navigation: Cancel  
and return to previous menu  
(
40).  
Shooting:Select focus area to  
left of current focus area (  
72).  
Full-frame playback: Display  
previous page of photo in-  
formation ( 129).  
Thumbnail playback:High-  
light thumbnail to left of  
current thumbnail ( 132).  
Menu navigation: Select  
highlighted item or display  
sub-menu ( 40).  
Shooting: Select focus area  
to right of current focus area  
(
72).  
Full-frame playback: Display  
next page of photo infor-  
mation ( 129).  
Thumbnail playback: High-  
light thumbnail to right of  
current thumbnail ( 132).  
Menu navigation: Move highlight bar down ( 40).  
Help: Scroll down ( 39).  
Shooting: Select focus area below current focus  
area ( 72).  
Full-frame playback: Display next image ( 35).  
Thumbnail playback: Highlight thumbnail below  
current thumbnail ( 132).  
The Multi Selector  
The button can also be used to select items highlighted in the camera menus. There  
may be some cases in which the operations listed on this page do not apply.  
14  
First Steps  
Getting the Camera Ready for Use  
Before using the camera for the first time, complete the following steps:  
Step 1 Attach the Camera Strap................................................................  
Step 2 Insert the Battery ...........................................................................  
15  
16  
For more information on batteries and alternative power sources, see:  
Technical Notes: Optional Accessories.................................................  
Caring for the Camera and Battery .....................................................  
235  
iv–v  
Step 3 Basic Setup.....................................................................................  
17–19  
For information on changing the clock battery, see:  
Technical Notes: Caring for Your Camera ............................................  
243  
Step 4 Attach a Lens..................................................................................  
20–21  
To learn more about the lenses available for the D2Hs, see:  
Technical Notes: Optional Accessories.................................................  
232–234  
Step 5 Insert a Memory Card.....................................................................  
22–24  
To learn more about compatible memory cards, see:  
Technical Notes: Approved Memory Cards..........................................  
For more information on formatting memory cards, see:  
The Setup Menu: Formatting Memory Cards.......................................  
240  
202  
Step 1—Attach the Camera Strap  
Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as  
shown below.  
15  
2
Step 2—Insert the Battery  
The D2Hs is powered by a rechargeable Nikon EN-EL4 Li-ion battery (provided).  
.1 Charge the battery  
2
The EN-EL4 is not fully charged at shipment. To maximize shooting  
time, charge the battery in the supplied MH-21 quick charger before  
use (see the MH-21 instruction manual for details). About 100 minutes  
are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains.  
.2 Turn the camera off  
2
Turn the camera off before inserting or re-  
moving batteries.  
.3 Remove the battery-chamber cover  
Turn the battery-chamber cover latch to the  
open position ( ) and remove the battery-  
chamber cover.  
2
.4 Attach the battery cover to the battery  
The battery can be charged with the cover  
attached. See the instructions provided  
with the EN-EL4 for details.  
2
.5 Insert the battery  
2
Insert the battery as shown at right.  
.6 Latch the battery-chamber cover  
To prevent the battery from being dislodged  
during operation, be sure the cover is se-  
curely latched.  
2
Removing the Battery  
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and rotate the battery-chamber cover  
latch to the open position ( ).  
EN-EL4 Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries  
The EN-EL4 shares information with compatible devices, enabling the camera to show  
battery charge state in six levels and the MH-21 to both display the current level and  
charge the battery appropriately. The Battery info option in the setup menu details  
battery charge, battery life, and the number of pictures taken ( 211).  
16  
3
Step 3—Basic Setup  
Choose a language and set the time and date as described below.  
.2  
.1  
3
3
Turn camera on.  
Display menus.*  
*If option is highlighted, press multi selector to left until icon at left of menu is se-  
lected.  
.3  
.5  
.7  
.4  
3
3
3
3
Display SET UP menu.  
Highlight Language.  
Highlight option.  
Position cursor in SET UP menu.  
.6  
3
Display options.  
.8  
3
Return to SET UP menu.  
17  
3
.9  
.10  
.12  
3
3
3
3
Highlight World Time.  
Highlight Time zone.  
Select local time zone.†  
Display options.  
.11  
.13  
3
Display map of world time zones.  
.14  
3
Return to WORLD TIME menu.‡  
UTC field shows time difference between selected time zone and Coordinated Uni-  
versal Time (UTC), in hours.  
If daylight saving time is in effect in local time zone, highlight Daylight saving time  
and press multi selector to right. Press multi selector down to highlight On and press  
multi selector right. Time will automatically be advanced one hour.  
.15  
.16  
3
3
Highlight Date.  
Display DATE menu.  
18  
3
.17  
.18  
Edit Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,  
and Second. Press multi selector left  
or right to select item, up or down to  
3
change. Press  
button to set date  
and time and return to to WORLD  
TIME menu.  
.19  
3
3
Highlight Date format.  
Display options.  
.18  
.19  
3
3
Choose order in which date is listed.  
Return to WORLD TIME menu.  
The camera clock is less accurate than  
most watches and household clocks.  
Check the clock regularly against  
more accurate time pieces and reset  
as necessary. The clock can be reset  
using the World Time option in the  
setup menu ( 201).  
.20  
3
Return to SET UP menu.  
The Clock Battery  
The clock-calendar is powered by a separate, non-rechargeable CR1616 lithium bat-  
tery with a life of about four years. When this battery is exhausted, a icon will  
be displayed in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on. For infor-  
mation on replacing the clock battery, see “Technical Notes: Caring for the Camera”  
(
243).  
19  
4
Step 4—Attach a Lens  
Nikon recommends using a type G or type D CPU lens to take full advantage  
of the features the camera offers.  
CPU lenses have CPU  
contacts  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
.1 Turn the camera off  
4
Turn the camera off before attaching or  
removing lenses.  
.2 Attach a lens  
4
Keeping the mounting mark on the lens  
aligned with the mounting mark on the  
camera body, position the lens in the cam-  
eras bayonet mount. Being careful not to  
press the lens-release button, rotate the lens  
counter-clockwise until it clicks into place.  
.3 Lock aperture at the minimum setting  
This step is not necessary if you are using a  
type G lens not equipped with an aperture  
ring. If you are using a lens of another type,  
lock aperture at the minimum setting (high-  
est f/-number).  
4
If this step is omitted when attaching a CPU  
lens, the aperture displays in the control  
panel and viewfinder will show a blinking  
when the camera is turned on. Photo-  
graphs can not be taken until the camera is  
turned off and aperture locked at the high-  
est f/-number.  
20  
4
Protect the Camera from Dirt and Dust  
Any dust, dirt, or other foreign matter inside your  
camera could show up as specks or blotches in your  
photographs or the viewfinder display. When no lens is  
in place, keep the lens mount covered with the supplied  
BF-1A body cap . When exchanging lens or replacing  
the body cap, keep the lens mount pointed down.  
Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging  
lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens-re-  
lease button while turning the lens clockwise.  
21  
5
Step 5—Insert a Memory Card  
In place of film, the D2Hs uses CompactFlash memory cards or microdrive  
cards to store photographs. For a list of approved memory cards, see “Tech-  
nical Notes: Approved Memory Cards” ( 240).  
.1 Turn the camera off  
5
Turn the camera off before inserting or re-  
moving memory cards.  
.2 Open the card slot cover  
3
5
Open the door protecting the card-slot cov-  
er release button ( ) and press the release  
button ( ) to open the card slot ( ).  
2
1
Direction of  
insertion  
.3 Insert a memory card  
5
Insert the memory card with the rear label  
Rear  
label  
toward the monitor ( ). When the mem-  
ory card is fully inserted, the green access  
lamp will light and the eject button will pop  
Terminals  
up ( ). Close the card slot cover.  
2
Inserting Memory Cards  
Insert the memory card terminals first. In-  
serting the card upside down or backwards  
could damage the camera or the card.  
Check to be sure that the card is in the cor-  
rect orientation.  
1
No Memory Card  
If no memory card is inserted in the camera when a  
charged EN-EL4 battery is inserted or the camera is  
powered by an AC adapter,  
will appear in the  
exposure-count displays in the control panel and view-  
finder.  
22  
5
.4 Format the memory card  
5
Memory cards must be formatted before first use.  
Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they  
may contain. Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you  
wish to keep to a computer before proceeding ( 223–225).  
To format the card, turn the camera on and hold the  
buttons down simultaneously for approximately two seconds. A blink-  
ing will appear in the shutter-speed display and the frame count  
(
and  
)
will blink. Pressing both buttons together a second time will format  
the memory card. Press any other button to exit without formatting.  
During formatting, the letters  
will appear in the frame-count dis-  
play. When formatting is complete, the frame-count display will show  
the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings.  
During Formatting  
Do not remove the card or battery or unplug the AC adapter  
(available separately) during formatting.  
Format ( 202)  
Memory cards can also be formatted using the Format option in the setup menu.  
23  
5
Memory Cards  
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory  
cards from the camera.  
• Format memory cards before first use.  
Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove  
memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the  
power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied  
to a computer. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in  
damage to the camera or card.  
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-  
age the card.  
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
Removing Memory Cards  
Memory cards can be removed without loss of data  
1
when the camera is off. Before removing the memory  
card, wait for the green card access lamp next to the  
card slot cover to go out and then turn the camera  
off. Do NOT attempt to remove the card while the  
access lamp is on. Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera  
or card. Open the door protecting the card-slot cover  
release button and press the release button to open the  
card slot, then press the eject button to partially eject  
2
Access lamp  
the card ( ). The card can then be removed by hand  
(
). Do not push on the memory card while pressing  
the eject button. Failure to observe this precaution  
could damage the memory card.  
24  
Tutorial  
Basic Photography and Playback  
This chapter takes you step-by-step through the  
process of taking your first photographs and  
playing them back.  
Basic Photography  
This section describes how to use autofocus  
and programmed auto autoexposure for simple,  
“point-and-shoot” photography that will pro-  
duce optimal results in most situations.  
Basic Playback  
Read this section for information on viewing pho-  
tographs in the monitor.  
25  
Basic Photography  
Taking Your First Photographs  
There are six basic steps to taking photographs:  
Step 1 Ready the Camera ..........................................................................  
27–28  
To learn how to restore settings to their default values, see:  
Taking Photographs: Two-Button Reset...............................................  
Menu Guide: The Shooting Menu—Reset Shooting Menu..................  
Menu Guide: The Custom Settings Menu—Menu Reset .....................  
126  
161  
172–173  
Step 2 Adjust Camera Settings..................................................................  
29–30  
To learn more about the following camera settings, see:  
Taking Photographs: Choosing a Shooting Mode................................  
Taking Photographs: Image Quality and Size ......................................  
Taking Photographs: Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency) ..............................  
Taking Photographs: White Balance....................................................  
Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment..............................................  
Taking Photographs: Focus..................................................................  
Taking Photographs: Exposure............................................................  
41–42  
43–49  
50–51  
52–64  
65–69  
70–81  
82–103  
Step 3 Frame the Photograph ...................................................................  
31  
To learn how to preview the effects of aperture, see:  
Taking Photographs: Exposure............................................................  
To learn about optional viewfinder accessories, see:  
83  
Technical Notes: Optional Accessories.................................................  
236  
Step 4 Focus...............................................................................................  
32  
To learn more about focus options, see:  
Taking Photographs: Focus..................................................................  
70–81  
Step 5 Check Exposure ..............................................................................  
33  
To learn how to change the composition after setting exposure, see:  
Taking Photographs: Exposure............................................................  
To learn more about flash photography, see:  
93  
Taking Photographs: Flash Photography.............................................  
104–114  
Step 6 Take the Photograph......................................................................  
34  
For information on time-lapse photography, see:  
Taking Photographs: Interval Timer Photography................................  
To learn how to delay shutter release, see:  
Taking Photographs: Self-Timer Mode.................................................  
115–119  
120  
26  
1
Step 1—Ready the Camera  
Before taking photographs, ready the camera as described below.  
.1 Turn the camera on  
1
The control panel will turn on and the dis-  
play in the viewfinder will light.  
.2 Check the battery level  
Check the battery level in the viewfinder or  
top control panel.  
1
Icon*  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Status  
Notes  
Battery fully  
charged  
Aperture and shutter-speed indicators in top  
control panel and all indicators in viewfinder  
turn off if no operations are performed for 6s  
(auto meter off). Press shutter-release button  
halfway to reactivate display.  
Battery  
partially  
discharged  
Low battery Ready fully-charged spare battery.  
Battery  
Shutter release disabled.  
(flashes) (flashes) exhausted  
*No icon displayed when camera powered by optional AC adapter.  
The Battery Indicator  
If the segments in the control panel battery icon blink on and off, the camera is calcu-  
lating the battery charge. The battery level will be displayed in about three seconds.  
The  
Icon  
icon in the control panel indicates that the battery has malfunctioned  
icon in the viewfinder may also  
flash). Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative.  
A flashing  
or is otherwise unsuitable for use in the D2Hs (the  
27  
1
.3 Check the number of exposures remaining  
The exposure-count display in the top con-  
trol panel shows the number of photographs  
that can be taken at current settings. When  
1
this number reaches zero, the  
icon will  
flash in the top control panel and a flashing  
icon will appear in the viewfinder. No  
further pictures can be taken until you de-  
lete pictures or insert a new memory card.  
You may be able to take additional pictures  
at lower image quality or size settings.  
The Monitor Cover  
A clear plastic cover (the BM-3 LCD monitor cover) is  
provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean,  
and to protect the monitor when the camera is not in  
use or when you are transporting the camera. To re-  
move the monitor cover, hold the camera firmly, take  
the cover by its edges, and pull the bottom of the cover  
A
/V  
O
U
T
DC  
I
N
gently outwards as shown at right ( ). Once the cover  
is unlatched, you can move it slightly away from the  
monitor and then remove it as shown ( ).  
To replace the cover for shooting or storage, insert the  
two projections on the top of the cover into the match-  
ing indentations above the camera monitor ( ), then  
press the bottom of the cover until you hear it click into  
place ( ).  
A
/V  
O
U
T
DC  
I
N
Camera Off Display  
If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory  
card inserted, the frame count and number of exposures  
remaining will be displayed (some memory cards may  
only display this information when the camera is on).  
28  
2
Step 2—Adjust Camera Settings  
This tutorial describes how to take photographs at the default settings listed  
in the table below, using a type G or D lens. Information on when and how  
to change settings from their default values is provided in “Taking Photo-  
graphs” ( 37).  
Image size White balance  
Exposure mode  
Rear  
control  
panel  
Focus area  
Top control panel  
Sensitivity Image quality  
Description  
Option  
Default  
Pictures are compressed for balance between  
image quality and file size that is ideal for  
snapshots.  
Image  
quality  
NORM  
(JPEG Normal)  
43–  
46  
Image  
size  
L
46–  
47  
Images are 2,464×1,632 pixels in size.  
(Large)  
Sensitivity (digital equivalent of film speed) 50–  
set to value roughly equivalent to ISO 200. 51  
Sensitivity  
200  
White  
A
White balance is adjusted automatically for 52–  
balance  
(Auto)  
natural colors under most types of lighting.  
64  
Built-in exposure program automatically ad-  
justs shutter speed and aperture for optimal  
exposure in most situations.  
Exposure  
mode (Programmed auto)  
83–  
91  
Focus  
Camera focuses on subject in center focus  
area.  
Center focus area  
area  
72  
.1 Set the shooting mode to single frame ( 41)  
)
2
Hold the mode-dial lock release down (  
and turn the shooting mode dial ( ) to S  
(single frame). At this setting, the camera  
will take one photograph each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed.  
29  
2
.2 Choose single-area AF ( 74)  
2
Rotate the AF-area mode selector until it  
clicks into place pointing to  
(single-area  
AF). At this setting, the user can choose  
from eleven focus areas. Pressing the shut-  
ter-release button halfway locks focus at  
the distance to the subject in the selected  
focus area.  
.3 Choose single-servo autofocus ( 70)  
Rotate the focus-mode selector until it  
clicks into place pointing to S (single-servo  
autofocus). At this setting, the camera  
will automatically focus on the subject in  
the selected focus area when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. Pictures  
can only be taken when the camera is in  
focus.  
2
.4 Choose matrix metering ( 82)  
2
Press the metering selector lock button  
and rotate the metering selector to  
(matrix metering). Matrix metering uses  
information from all areas of the frame to  
determine exposure, ensuring optimal re-  
sults for the entire frame. If a type G or D  
lens is mounted on the camera, 3D matrix  
metering II is used for exposure control that  
takes into account maximum brightness,  
contrast, and the distance to the subject.  
When matrix metering is selected, the metering display in the view-  
finder shows  
.
30  
3
Step 3—Frame a Photograph  
To prevent blurred photographs caused by unsteady hands (camera shake),  
hold the camera steadily in both hands, with your elbows propped lightly  
against your torso for support. Hold the handgrip in your right hand and  
cradle the camera body or lens with your left.  
The shutter-release button  
for vertical shooting ( 4)  
can be used when taking  
photographs in portrait  
(tall) orientation.  
The recommended stance for taking photographs is with one foot a half pace  
in front of the other and your upper body stable.  
Viewfinder Focus  
The viewfinder is equipped with diopter adjustment to  
accommodate individual differences in vision. To adjust  
viewfinder focus, pull the diopter adjustment knob out  
1
2
(
) and rotate it until the viewfinder display and focus  
brackets are in sharp focus ( ). When operating the  
diopter adjustment knob with your eye to the view-  
finder, be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails  
in your eye.  
Diopter can be adjusted in the range –3m–1 to +1m–1. Corrective lenses (available  
separately;  
236) allow diopters of –6m–1 to +3m–1.  
Attaching Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses  
Before attaching a diopter-adjustment viewfinder lens,  
remove the DK-17 viewfinder eyepiece by closing the  
viewfinder shutter to release the eyepiece lock ( ) and  
then unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right ( ).  
31  
4
Step 4—Focus  
In single-servo AF, the camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus  
area when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. After centering the  
focus brackets on your subject, press the shutter-release button halfway and  
check focus in the viewfinder.  
Viewfinder display  
Description  
Subject in focus.  
Focus point is between camera and subject.  
Focus point is behind subject.  
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus brackets using  
autofocus.  
(flashes)  
To focus on an off-center subject, use focus lock ( 78–79) or select the  
focus area containing your subject using the multi selector ( 72). For infor-  
mation on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus, see  
“Getting Good Results with Autofocus” ( 80).  
32  
5
Step 5—Check Exposure  
In exposure mode P (programmed auto), the cam-  
era automatically sets shutter speed and aperture  
when the shutter-release button is pressed half-  
way. Before shooting, check the shutter-speed  
and aperture indicators in the viewfinder. If the  
photo would be under- or over-exposed at cur-  
rent settings, one of the following indicators will  
appear in either the shutter-speed or aperture  
display.  
Indicator  
Description  
Photo will be overexposed. Use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter.  
Photo will be underexposed. Raise sensitivity ( 50–51) or use optional  
Speedlight ( 104).  
Shutter Speed and Camera Shake  
To prevent blurring caused by camera shake, the shutter speed should be faster than  
the inverse of the focal length of the lens, in seconds (for example, if a lens has a  
1
focal length of 50mm, shutter speed should be faster than /60 s). Use of a tripod is  
recommended when shooting at slower shutter speeds. To prevent blur, try increasing  
sensitivity ( 50–51) or using a VR lens. An optional Speedlight ( 104) can be used  
to prevent blur at shutter speeds of 1/60 s or slower.  
33  
6
Step 6—Take the Photograph  
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the rest  
of the way down.  
While the photograph is being recorded to the  
memory card, the access lamp next to the card  
slot cover will light. Do not eject the memory  
card, turn the camera off, or remove or dis-  
connect the power source until the lamp has  
gone out. Removing the memory card or cutting  
power in these circumstances could result in loss  
of data.  
Do Not Photograph Strong Light Sources  
Avoid taking pictures with the camera focused on the sun or other strong light source.  
Intense light may cause deterioration in the image sensor the camera uses in place of  
film. It may also produce a white blur effect in photographs.  
Rotate Tall ( 157)  
This playback menu option controls whether portrait-orientation photographs taken  
with On selected for the Auto image rotation option in the setup menu are auto-  
matically rotated during playback.  
Image Review ( 156)  
Photographs can be viewed at any time during or after recording by pressing the  
button. When On is selected for the Image review option in the playback menu,  
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting.  
34  
Basic Playback  
Viewing Photographs  
To play photographs back, press the button. The most recent photograph  
will be displayed in the monitor.  
Viewing Additional Photographs  
To page through photographs in the order recorded, press the multi selector  
down. Press the multi selector up to view photographs in reverse order. To  
scroll rapidly through the images on the memory card, press and hold the up  
or down buttons on the multi selector.  
When the last photograph on the memory card is displayed, you can return  
to the first photograph by pressing the multi selector down. When the first  
photograph in memory is displayed, you can view the last photograph by  
pressing the multi selector up.  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs  
To delete the photograph currently  
displayed in the monitor, press the  
button. A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed. Press the  
button again  
to delete the image and return to  
playback. To exit without deleting the  
picture, press the multi selector left or  
right.  
Take Additional Photographs  
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the  
the shutter-release button halfway.  
button or press  
Delete ( 146)  
To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu.  
35  
36  
Taking  
Photographs  
The Details  
Tutorial: Basic Photography” described the ba-  
sic order of operations for taking photographs at  
the most commonly-used settings. This chapter  
explains how and when to adjust camera settings  
for different shooting conditions.  
37  
The chart below shows the basic order for adjusting settings when taking  
photographs. Before proceeding, be sure to read “Using Camera Menus”  
(
39) for information on menu operations.  
Will this be a single photo, or a series of photos?  
Choosing a Shooting Mode......................................................  
41–42  
How will this photograph be used?  
Image Quality and Size ............................................................  
Image Adjustment ...................................................................  
43–49  
65–69  
What lighting is available?  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)....................................................  
White Balance .........................................................................  
50–51  
52–64  
What is the subject, and how will I compose the photograph?  
Focus ......................................................................................  
71–82  
82  
How important is background lighting to the photograph?  
Exposure: Metering .................................................................  
What is more important, shutter speed or aperture?  
Exposure: Exposure Mode ........................................................  
83–91  
Is the subject very bright, very dark, or high contrast?  
Exposure: Exposure Compensation ...........................................  
Exposure: Bracketing ...............................................................  
95  
96–103  
Will I need a flash?  
Flash Photography................................................................... 104–114  
How do I want to control the shutter?  
Interval Timer Photography...................................................... 115–119  
Self-Timer Mode......................................................................  
120  
38  
Using Camera Menus  
Basic Menu Operations  
The next four sections involve settings that can be  
accessed via the camera menus. To view the menus,  
turn the camera on and press the  
button.  
Choosing a Menu  
There are five main menus: the playback menu,  
the shooting menu, the Custom Settings menu,  
the setup menu, and Recent Settings. When the  
menu button is pressed, the camera displays the  
last menu used. To select a different menu:  
1
2
If menu item is highlighted, press  
.
Select menu.  
Position cursor in selected menu.  
3
Recent Settings  
The Recent Settings ( ) menu lists the eight most  
recently selected items in the shooting and Custom  
Settings menus. Items can be selected in the Recent  
Settings menu as described on the following page. Use  
this menu to access frequently-used options.  
Help  
For help on menu options, press the  
button. A de-  
scription of the currently selected option or menu will  
be displayed. Press the multi selector up or down to  
scroll the display.  
39  
Making a Selection  
To modify settings for an item in the current menu:  
1
3
2
4
Highlight menu item.  
Display options.  
Highlight option.  
Make selection.  
To return to the previous menu without making a selection, press the multi  
selector to the left.  
• The selection for some options is made from a sub-menu. Repeat steps 3  
and 4 to make a selection from a sub-menu.  
• Some menu items are not available while images are being recorded to the  
memory card.  
• Pressing the  
button or the center of the multi selector performs the  
same function as pressing the multi selector to the right. In some cases,  
a selection can only be made using  
selector.  
button or the center of the multi  
Exiting the Menus  
To exit the menus, press the  
the button twice). You can also exit the menus by pressing the  
button (if a menu option is highlighted, press  
button  
to exit to playback mode or by turning the camera off. To exit the menus  
and focus the camera for the next shot, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
40  
Choosing a Shooting Mode  
Single Frame, Continuous, Self-Timer, or Mirror Up  
Shooting mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a  
time, in a continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with  
the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration.  
Mode  
Description  
S
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is  
pressed. Access lamp will light while photo is recorded; next shot can  
be taken immediately if enough space remains in memory buffer.  
Single  
frame  
CL  
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records 1–7 frames  
Continuous per second.* Frame rate can be chosen using Custom Setting d1  
low speed (Shooting Speed;  
186).  
CH  
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records up to 8  
frames per second.*  
Continuous  
high speed  
Use the self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by  
camera shake ( 120).  
Self-timer  
Press shutter-release button once to raise mirror, again to take photo-  
graph (shutter will be released automatically if shutter-release button is  
not pressed for 30s after mirror up). Mirror will be lowered after shut-  
ter is released. Choose this mode to reduce release lag in situations in  
which timing is paramount, or to minimize camera shake in situations  
in which the least camera movement can result in blurred photographs.  
Note that autofocus, metering, and framing can not be confirmed in the  
viewfinder while mirror is raised.  
M-UP  
Mirror up  
*Average frame rate with continuous-  
servo AF, manual or shutter-priority  
auto exposure, a shutter speed of ½50 s  
or faster, and memory remaining in  
memory buffer. Number of pictures  
that can be stored in buffer depends on  
image quality (see right; figures assume  
a sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent). Ad-  
ditional photographs can be taken as  
soon as enough memory is available in  
buffer.  
Compressed NEF+JPEG  
Uncompressed NEF+JPEG  
Compressed NEF  
Uncompressed NEF  
TIFF (RGB)  
40  
50  
JPEG  
41  
To choose a shooting mode, press the mode dial  
lock release and turn the mode dial to the desired  
setting.  
The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shoot-  
ing to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. When the  
buffer is full, the shutter is disabled until enough data have been transferred to the  
memory card to make room for another photograph. In continuous mode, shooting  
will continue as long as the shutter-release button is held down, although the frame  
rate will drop once the buffer has filled.  
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to  
the memory card slot will light. Depending on the number of the images in the buf-  
fer, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the  
memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp  
has gone out. If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power  
will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. To turn the cam-  
era off without recording the images in the buffer, press the  
button while turning  
the camera off (keep the button pressed for at least one second after turning the  
camera off). If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter  
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.  
The approximate time required to write the entire buffer to a 512MB SanDisk SDCFH  
(Ultra II) card is as follows (sensitivity set to ISO 200 equivalent):  
Uncompressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG Basic (Large)  
Uncompressed NEF (RAW)  
TIFF RGB (Large)  
48s (40 frames)  
42s (40 frames)  
394s (39 frames)  
13s (50 frames)  
JPEG Fine (Large)  
Buffer Size  
The number of images that can be stored in the memory  
buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count  
displays in the viewfinder and top control panel while  
the shutter-release button is pressed.  
d2—Maximum Shots ( 186)  
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be lim-  
ited to any amount between one and fifty.  
42  
Image Quality and Size  
Making Effective Use of Memory  
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photo-  
graph occupies on the memory card.  
Image Quality  
The D2Hs supports the following image quality options (listed in descending  
order by image quality and file size):  
Option  
NEF+JPEG Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-qual-  
Fine ity JPEG image.  
NEF+JPEG Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-  
Normal quality JPEG image.  
NEF+JPEG Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-qual-  
Description  
Basic  
ity JPEG image.  
Raw 12-bit data from the image sensor are saved directly to the  
memory card in Nikon Electronic Format (NEF).  
NEF (Raw)  
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit depth of 8 bits per  
channel (24-bit color). Time needed to record images increases.  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG Fine Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:4.  
JPEG Normal Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:8.  
JPEG Basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1:16.  
NEF (Raw)/NEF+JPEG  
NEF (RAW) images can only be viewed in PictureProject or in Nikon Capture 4 version  
4.2.1 or later (available via download to purchasers of Nikon Capture 4; 238). When  
photographs taken at NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal, or NEF+JPEG Basic are  
viewed on the camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When photographs  
taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.  
White balance bracketing can not be used with NEF (RAW) images. Selecting an NEF  
(RAW) option for image quality cancels white balance bracketing. White balance for  
NEF (RAW) images can be adjusted using Nikon Capture 4.  
TIFF (RGB)  
About 10s are required to record a TIFF (RGB) image (512MB SanDisk SDCFH (Ultra II)  
card; recording time varies with make of memory card).  
43  
Image quality can be set using the Image quality option in the shooting  
menu or by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial.  
Two options are available for controlling compression: Raw compression for  
NEF (RAW) images ( 46) and JPEG compression for JPEG images ( 45).  
The Image Quality Menu  
Highlight Image quality in the shooting  
1
2
menu ( 158) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
The QUAL Button  
Press the QUAL button and rotate the main com-  
mand dial (note that Raw compression and  
JPEG compression can only be adjusted from the  
shooting menu). Image quality is displayed in the  
rear control panel and viewfinder sidebar:  
Option  
Rear panel Viewfinder  
+
NEF+JPEG Fine  
RAW FINE  
Rear control panel  
+
RAW  
NEF+JPEG Normal  
NEF+JPEG Basic  
NORM  
+
RAW  
BASIC  
RAW  
TIFF  
NEF (Raw)  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG Fine  
FINE  
Viewfinder  
NORM  
BASIC  
JPEG Normal  
JPEG Basic  
44  
The JPEG Compression Menu  
The JPEG compression menu offers the following options for JPEG images:  
Option  
Size priority Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform file size.  
(default) Quality varies with scene recorded.  
Description  
Optimal quality Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene recorded.  
The effects of these options are most pronounced with large image sizes  
(
46), high sensitivity ( 50), complex scenes, image quality settings of  
NEF+BASIC or BASIC, or heavy sharpening ( 65). To choose an option:  
Highlight JPEG compression in the shooting  
1
2
menu ( 158) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting  
menu will be displayed. The selected op-  
tion takes effect whenever image quality is  
set to NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal,  
NEF+JPEG Basic, JPEG Fine, JPEG Normal,  
or JPEG Basic.  
File Names  
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where  
nnnn is a four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascend-  
ing order by the camera, and xxx is one of the following three letter extensions: “NEF”  
for NEF images, “TIF” for TIFF-RGB, “JPG” for JPEG images, and “NDF” for Dust Off  
ref photos ( 209–210). The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a setting of “NEF+JPEG”  
have the same file names but different extensions. Images recorded in color mode II  
(
67) have names that begin with an underbar (e.g., “_DSC0001.JPG”). The “DSC”  
portion of the file name can be changed using the File Naming option in the shooting  
menu ( 163).  
45  
The Raw Compression Menu  
The following options are available for NEF (RAW) images:  
Option  
Description  
Comp. NEF (Raw) NEF images are compressed, reducing file size by about 40–50%  
(default)  
percent with almost no effect on image quality.  
NEF images are not compressed.  
NEF (Raw)  
Highlight Raw compression in the shooting  
menu ( 158) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
1
2
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting  
menu will be displayed. The selected op-  
tion takes effect whenever image quality is  
set to NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal,  
NEF+JPEG Basic, or NEF (Raw).  
Image Size  
Image size is measured in pixels. Smaller sizes produce smaller files, making  
them suited to distribution via e-mail or inclusion in web pages. Conversely,  
the larger the image, the larger the size at which it can be printed without  
becoming noticeably “grainy. Choose image size according to the space  
available on the memory card and the task at hand.  
Option  
Large  
Size (pixels)  
2,464×1,632  
1,840×1,224  
Print size (cm)*  
31.3×20.7 (12˝×8˝)  
23.4×15.5 (9˝×6˝)  
Medium  
*Approximate size when printed at 200dpi.  
46  
Image size can be set using the Image size option in the shooting menu or  
by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub-command dial. Note that  
the option selected does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images. When  
opened in PictureProject or Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later, NEF im-  
ages are 2,464×1,632 pixels in size.  
The Image Size Menu  
Highlight Image size in the shooting menu  
1
2
(
158) and press the multi selector to the  
right.  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
The QUAL Button  
Image size can also be set by pressing the QUAL  
button and rotating the sub-command dial. Im-  
age size is displayed in the rear control panel and  
in the viewfinder sidebar:  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
47  
Memory Card Capacity and Image Quality/Size  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on  
a 512MB card at different image quality and size settings.  
Image quality  
Image size  
File size (MB)1  
8.90  
No. of images1 Buffer capacity2  
L6  
M6  
L6  
M6  
L6  
M6  
L
M
L
M
L
53  
60  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
NEF+JPEG Fine3, 4, 5  
8.00  
7.90  
7.50  
7.40  
7.20  
6.90  
12.00  
7.00  
1.90  
1.10  
0.99  
0.57  
0.51  
61  
65  
66  
69  
NEF+JPEG Normal3, 4, 5  
NEF+JPEG Basic3, 4, 5  
NEF (Raw)4  
72  
39  
69  
TIFF (RGB)  
205  
354  
390  
650  
709  
1300  
JPEG Fine5  
JPEG Normal5  
JPEG Basic5  
M
L
M
0.30  
1All figures are approximate. Size of JPEG files varies with scene recorded.  
2Maximum number of frames that can be stored in memory buffer. Turning Long  
Exp. NR on halves buffer capacity.  
3Total for NEF and JPEG images.  
4Figures assume Raw compression is set to NEF (Raw). Selecting Comp. NEF  
(Raw) decreases file size of NEF (RAW) images by approximately forty to fifty percent;  
although number of exposures remaining does not change, number of images that  
can be recorded increases.  
5Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Fixed size. Selecting Optimal quality  
increases file size of JPEG images by up to eighty percent; number of images and  
buffer capacity drop accordingly.  
6Applies to JPEG images only. File size of NEF (RAW) images can not be changed.  
48  
Number of Exposures Remaining  
The number of exposures remaining shown in the exposure count displays in the  
control panel and viewfinder is only an approximation. The number of compressed  
NEF or JPEG images that can be stored on a memory card depends on the subject and  
composition of each photograph. In general, the more detailed the image, the larger  
the resulting file and the fewer the images that can be stored.  
Large-Capacity Memory Cards  
When enough memory remains on the memory card to  
record a thousand or more pictures at current settings,  
the number of exposures remaining will be shown in  
thousands, rounded down to the nearest hundred (e.g.,  
if there is room for approximately 1,260 exposures, the  
exposure count display will show 1.2K).  
d2—Maximum Shots ( 186)  
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be lim-  
ited to any amount between one and fifty.  
49  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)  
Reacting Faster to Light  
“Sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the sensitivity,  
the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds  
or smaller apertures.  
Sensitivity can be set between values roughly equivalent to ISO 200 and ISO  
1
1600 in steps equivalent to /3 EV. Settings of HI-1 and HI-2 (respectively  
1EV and 2EV over ISO 1600) are available where high sensitivity is a priority.  
Sensitivity can be adjusted using the ISO option in the shooting menu or by  
pressing the ISO button and rotating the main command dial.  
The ISO Menu  
Highlight ISO in the shooting menu ( 158)  
1
2
and press the multi selector to the right.  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
The ISO Button  
Sensitivity can also be set by pressing the ISO  
button and rotating the main command dial.  
Sensitivity is displayed in the control panels and  
viewfinder sidebar:  
Top control panel  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
*
Viewfinder display  
shows  
and  
.
50  
HI-1/HI-2  
The higher the sensitivity, the more likely pictures are to be subject to “noise” in the  
form of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels. Photos taken at HI-1 or HI-2 will  
likely contain appreciable amounts of noise.  
High ISO NR ( 165)  
This option can be used to reduce noise at sensitivities of ISO 800 or more. Note that  
although noise reduction is always in effect at sensitities of HI-1 and HI-2, turning  
High ISO NR on will increase the amount of noise reduction performed.  
b1—ISO Auto ( 180)  
When ON is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto), the camera will automatically  
vary sensitivity from the value selected by the user to help ensure optimum exposure.  
Sensitivity can not be set to HI-1 or HI-2 while ISO auto is on, and ON can not be  
selected for ISO auto is when ISO is set to HI-1 or HI-2.  
b2—ISO Step Value ( 181)  
Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting b2, sensitivity can also be set in  
increments equivalent to ½ or 1EV.  
ISO step value set to 1/2 step  
ISO step value set to 1 step  
If possible, the current sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed.  
If the current sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value, sensitivity will be  
rounded up to the nearest available setting.  
d5—Cntrl Panel/Finder>Rear Control Panel ( 188)  
If Frame Count is selected for Cntrl panel/finder display>Rear control panel  
(Custom Setting d5), sensitivity will only be displayed in the rear control panel while  
the ISO button is pressed. If ISO is selected, sensitivity will be displayed except during  
voice memo recording and playback.  
51  
White Balance  
Keeping Colors True  
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light  
source. The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light  
source, with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the  
shade, direct sunlight, or under incandescent lighting. Unlike the film used in  
film cameras, digital cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images  
according to the color of the light source. This is known as “white balance.”  
For natural coloration, choose a white balance setting that matches the light  
source before shooting. The following options are available:  
Approximate  
color  
Option  
temperature  
Description  
White balance adjusted automatically using color  
temperature measured by 1,005-pixel RGB sen-  
sor, image sensor, and ambient light sensor. For  
best results, use type G or D lens. With SB-800 or  
SB-600 Speedlight, white balance reflects condi-  
tions in effect when Speedlight fires.  
3,500–  
8,000K  
Auto  
Incandescent  
Fluorescent  
Direct sunlight  
Flash  
3,000K  
4,200K  
5,200K  
5,400K  
6,000K  
8,000K  
Use under incandescent lighting.  
Use under fluorescent lighting.  
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.  
Use with Nikon Speedlights.  
Cloudy  
Use in daylight under overcast skies.  
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.  
Choose color temperature from list of values  
Shade  
Choose color  
temp.  
2,500–  
10,000K  
(
56).  
White balance  
preset  
Use subject, light source, or existing photo-  
graph as reference for white balance ( 57).  
Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired  
results can not be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from  
the list above or use preset white balance.  
52  
White balance can be set using the White Balance option in the shooting  
menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial.  
The White Balance Menu  
Highlight White Balance in the shooting  
1
2
menu ( 158) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. Selecting Choose  
color temp. displays a menu of color tem-  
peratures ( 56), White balance preset a  
preset white balance menu (  
57), other  
options a fine-tuning dialog ( 54).  
The WB Button  
White balance can also be set by pressing the  
WB button and rotating the main command dial.  
White balance is displayed in the rear control  
panel and viewfinder sidebar:  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
Studio Strobe Lighting  
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with studio strobe lighting.  
Choose a color temperature, use preset white balance, or set white balance to Flash  
and use fine tuning to adjust white balance.  
e5—Auto BKT Set ( 192)  
When WB bracketing is selected for custom setting e5 (Auto BKT set), the camera  
will create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be var-  
ied with each image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance.  
53  
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
At settings other than  
(Choose color temp.) and PRE (preset), white  
balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of  
the light source or to introduce a deliberate “warm” or “cold” cast into  
an image. Higher settings can be used to lend images a bluish tinge or to  
compensate for light sources with a yellow or red cast, while lowering white  
balance can make photographs appear slightly more yellow or red or com-  
pensate for light sources with a blue cast. Adjustments can be made in the  
range +3 to –3 in increments of one. Except in Fluorescent mode, each  
increment is equivalent to about 10 mired.  
White balance is fine tuned using the White bal. option in the shooting  
menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial.  
The White Balance Menu  
In the white balance menu ( 52), highlight  
1
2
an option other than Choose color temp.  
or White bal. preset and press the multi  
selector to the right.  
Press the multi selector up or down to choose  
the desired value and press the multi selector  
to the right. The shooting menu will be dis-  
played.  
Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color  
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with ref-  
erence to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light  
in the same wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neigh-  
borhood of 5,000–5,500K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature,  
such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a  
higher color temperature appear tinged with blue.  
54  
The WB Button  
Press the WB button and rotate the sub-command  
dial until the desired value is displayed in the rear  
control panel. At settings other than 0, a  
icon appears in the rear control panel and view-  
finder sidebar.  
Viewfinder  
Rear control panel  
Fine-Tuning and Color Temperature  
Approximate color-temperatures for settings other than A (auto) are given below (val-  
ues may differ from color temperatures given by photo color meters):  
Direct  
sunlight  
4,800K  
4,900K  
5,000K  
5,200K  
5,300K  
5,400K  
5,600K  
Cloudy  
(daylight)  
5,400K  
5,600K  
5,800K  
6,000K  
6,200K  
6,400K  
6,600K  
Shade  
(daylight)  
6,700K  
7,100K  
7,500K  
8,000K  
8,400K  
8,800K  
9,200K  
Incandescent Fluorescent*  
Flash  
+3  
+2  
+1  
0
–1  
–2  
–3  
2,700K  
2,800K  
2,900K  
3,000K  
3,100K  
3,200K  
3,300K  
2,700K  
3,000K  
3,700K  
4,200K  
5,000K  
6,500K  
7,200K  
4,800K  
5,000K  
5,200K  
5,400K  
5,600K  
5,800K  
6,000K  
*The size of the increments for Fluorescent reflects the wide variations in color tem-  
perature among the many different types of fluorescent light source, ranging from  
low-temperature stadium lighting to high-temperature mercury-vapor lamps.  
“Mired”  
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low  
color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change  
of 1000K produces a much greater change in color at 3000K than at 6000K. Mired,  
calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106, is a measure of  
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used  
in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:  
• 4000K–3000K(a difference of 1000K)=83mired  
• 7000K–6000K(a difference of 1000K)=24mired  
55  
Choosing a Color Temperature  
Choose a setting of (Choose color temp.) to select the color temperature  
from thirty-one predetermined values ranging from 2,500K to 10,000K in  
increments of roughly 10 mired (note that the desired results will not be ob-  
tained with flash or fluorescent lighting). Color temperature can be selected  
in the white-balance menu or with the WB button and sub-command dial.  
The White Balance Menu  
In the white balance menu ( 52), highlight  
1
2
an Choose color temp. and press the multi  
selector to the right.  
Highlight the desired color temperature and  
press the multi selector to the right. The  
shooting menu will be displayed.  
The WB Button  
At a setting of  
(Choose color temp.), color  
temperature can be selected by pressing the WB  
button and rotating the sub-command dial. The  
color temperature is displayed in the rear control  
panel:  
Take Test Shots  
Take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate to the light source.  
56  
Preset White Balance  
Preset white balance is used to record and recall custom white balance set-  
tings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources  
with a strong color cast. Four options are available for setting preset white  
balance:  
Recording New Values with the Camera  
(1) Frame a neutral gray or white object and press the shutter-release button  
to measure a value for white balance ( 58).  
(2) Measure white balance with the ambient light sensor ( 58).  
Copying Values from Existing Photographs  
(3) Copy white balance from another image on the memory card ( 63).  
(4) Copy white balance from Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later ( 64).  
The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets  
d-0–d-4. White balance values recorded with options (1) and (2) are stored  
in preset d-0. To prevent this value from being replaced the next time white  
balance is measured, the value stored in d-0 can be copied to presets d-1–d-4  
for long-term storage ( 64). White balance values copied using options (3)  
and (4) are also stored in presets d-1–d-4. A descriptive comment can be  
added to any white balance preset ( 62).  
d-0  
d-1d-4  
Stores last val-  
ue measured  
for white bal-  
ance ( 58).  
Store values copied from d-0 (  
64).  
Store values cop-  
ied from images  
on memory card  
(
63).  
Store values created in Nikon Capture 4 version  
4.2.1 or later (available separately; 64).  
White Balance Presets  
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks ( 159). A con-  
firmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset  
created in another shooting menu bank (no warning is displayed for preset d-0).  
57  
Measuring a Value for White Balance  
White balance can be measured with reference to a neutral gray object or by  
measuring the color of the light source. The new value for white balance is  
automatically stored in preset d-0.  
Reference  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in  
final photograph and white balance is measured using both 1,005-pixel  
RGB sensor and main image sensor. Use for flash photography or when  
the subject and camera are under different lighting. In studio settings,  
18% diffusion panel can be used to make reference object appear gray.  
Neutral  
gray  
object  
Color of light source is measured by sensor on camera pentaprism and  
white balance adjusted to produce natural coloration without reference  
object. Use when subject is under same lighting as camera.  
Light  
source  
Press the WB button and rotate the main com-  
mand dial until is displayed in the rear  
control panel or viewfinder sidebar.  
1
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately, select  
preset d-0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial  
until d-0 is displayed in the rear control panel ( 61). Otherwise there is  
no need to select d-0 when measuring a new value for white balance.  
58  
Release the WB button briefly and then press  
the button until the icon in the rear control  
panel and viewfinder sidebar start to flash. A  
blinking will also appear in the top control  
2
3
panel and viewfinder frame-count displays.  
Rear control panel  
Top control panel  
Viewfinder  
To measure white balance using a neutral gray or white object…  
…frame the reference object so that it fills the  
viewfinder and press the shutter-release but-  
ton all the way down. The camera will mea-  
sure a value for white balance and store it in  
preset d-0. No photograph will be recorded;  
white balance can be measured accurately  
even when the camera is not in focus.  
To measure the color of the light source…  
…make sure that the ambient light sensor is  
lit by the light source and press the FUNC.  
button. The camera will calculate a value for  
white balance and store it in preset d-0.  
To exit without measuring a new value for  
white balance, press the WB button.  
Exposure Mode  
Preset white balance can be measured in all exposure modes. When using a reference  
object to set white balance, do not alter exposure from the value suggested by the  
camera.  
59  
If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance,  
will  
4
flash for about three seconds in the control panels, while the viewfinder  
will show a flashing  
.
Viewfinder  
Rear control panel  
Top control panel  
If lighting is too dark or too bright, or if some types of artificial lighting  
are used when measuring white balance using the ambient light sensor,  
the camera may be unable to measure white balance. A flashing  
will appear in the control panels and viewfinder for about three seconds.  
Return to Step 3 and measure white balance again. If the camera is un-  
able to measure white balance using the ambient light sensor, try mea-  
suring white balance using a neutral gray or white reference object.  
Viewfinder  
Rear control panel  
Top control panel  
The new value for white balance will be stored in  
preset d-0, automatically replacing the previous  
value for this preset (no confirmation dialog will  
be displayed). If white balance was set using a  
reference object, a thumbnail will be displayed in  
the preset white balance list. Presets measured  
using the ambient light sensor are marked by a  
icon.  
To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has  
been measured for white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance  
will be set to a color temperature of 5,200K, the same as Direct sun-  
light). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0 until white  
balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the other  
presets before measuring a new value for white balance, up to five white  
balance values can be stored ( 64).  
60  
Selecting a White Balance Preset  
To set white balance to a preset value:  
Highlight White bal. preset in the white bal-  
1
2
ance menu ( 52) and press the multi selector  
to the right. The menu shown at right will be  
displayed. (To return to the shooting menu,  
press the  
button.)  
Presets are identified by an icon or thumbnail,  
a name (d-0d-4), and a comment. Press the  
multi selector up, down, left, or right to high-  
light the desired preset. To select the high-  
lighted preset and return to shooting mode  
without completing steps 3–5, press the  
button.  
Press the center of the multi selector to display  
the menu shown at right. To view options for  
other presets, highlight the name of the cur-  
rent preset (d-0d-4) and press the multi  
selector right.  
3
Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button  
At a setting of  
(White bal. preset), presets can also  
be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the  
sub-command dial. The current preset is displayed in  
the rear control panel while the WB button is pressed.  
61  
Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
4
5
light Set.  
Press the multi selector to the right to set  
white balance to the value stored in the  
selected preset and return to the shooting  
menu.  
Entering a Comment  
To enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty-six  
characters for a selected white balance preset,  
highlight the preset in the thumbnail display and  
press the center of the multi selector as described  
in steps 1–3 on the previous page. The menu  
shown at right will be displayed.  
Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
1
2
3
light Edit comment.  
Press the multi selector to the right to display  
the text edit dialog. Edit the comment as de-  
scribed on page 205.  
Press the button to return to the thumbnail  
display.  
62  
Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1d-4 Only)  
To copy a value for white balance from a photo-  
graph on the memory card to a selected preset  
(d-1d-4 only), highlight the preset in the thumb-  
nail display and press the center of the multi se-  
lector as described in steps 1–3 on page 61. The  
menu shown at right will be displayed.  
Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
1
2
3
4
light Select image.  
Press the multi selector to the right to display  
the photographs on the memory card. Only  
photographs taken with the D2Hs will be dis-  
played; other images can not be selected.  
Press the multi selector up, down, left, or right  
to highlight the desired image. To view the  
highlighted image full frame, press the but-  
ton. Press the button again to return to the  
thumbnail list.  
Press the center of the multi selector to copy  
the white balance value for the highlighted  
photograph to the selected preset and return  
to the thumbnail display. If the highlighted  
photograph has a comment, the comment  
will be copied to the comment for the selected  
preset.  
63  
Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1d-4  
To copy a measured value for white balance  
from d-0 to any of the other presets (d-1d-4),  
highlight the destination preset in the thumbnail  
display and press the center of the multi selector  
as described in steps 1–3 on page 61. The menu  
shown at right will be displayed.  
Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
1
2
light Copy d-0.  
Press the multi selector to the right to copy  
white balance from d-0 to the selected preset  
and return to the thumbnail display. If com-  
ment has been created for d-0, the comment  
will be copied to the comment for the selected  
preset.  
Nikon Capture 4  
Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later (available via download to purchasers of Nikon  
Capture 4) can be used to edit white balance when RAW photographs taken with  
the D2Hs are displayed on a computer. The edited value can be copied directly to a  
white balance preset while the camera is connected to a computer, or the image can  
be saved to the camera memory card and the white balance value copied using the  
Select image option in the preset menu. Any comments created with Nikon Capture  
4 will also be copied to the comment for the selected preset. See the Nikon Capture  
4 manual for details.  
64  
Image Adjustment  
Shooting Menu Settings  
This section describes settings that can only be adjusted from the shooting  
menu ( 158).  
Making Edges More Distinct: Image Sharpening  
When a photograph is taken, the camera automatically processes the image  
to increase the distinction between light and dark areas, making the picture  
appear sharper. The Image sharpening menu controls the amount of  
sharpening performed.  
Option  
Description  
The camera automatically adjusts sharpening according to the  
subject and how other camera settings are adjusted. Amount  
of sharpening varies from shot to shot, even in scenes of same  
type; to take multiple shots with same sharpening, choose dif-  
ferent setting. For best results, use a type G or D lens.  
Auto  
(default)  
Normal  
Low  
Camera sharpens all images the same standard amount.  
Images are sharpened less than the standard amount.  
Medium low Images are sharpened slightly less than the standard amount.  
Medium high Images are sharpened slightly more than the standard amount.  
High  
Images are sharpened more than the standard amount.  
Images are not sharpened.  
None  
Highlight Image sharpening in the shooting  
menu ( 158) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
1
2
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
65  
Adjusting Contrast: Tone Compensation  
As photographs are saved to the memory card, they are processed to adjust  
the distribution of tones in the image, enhancing contrast. Tone compen-  
sation is performed by means of tone curves that define the relationship  
between the distribution of tones in the original image and the compensated  
result. The Tone compensation menu controls the type of curve used.  
Option  
Description  
Camera automatically optimizes contrast by selecting the appropriate  
curve. Curve varies from shot to shot, even in scenes of same type;  
to take multiple shots with same curve, choose different setting. For  
best results, use a type G or D lens.  
Auto  
(default)  
Camera uses same standard curve for all images. Suited to most  
scenes, whether dark or bright.  
Normal  
Less  
Produces “softer” images. Prevents highlights on portrait subjects  
contrast from being “washed out” in direct sunlight.  
More Choose this curve to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other  
contrast low-contrast subjects.  
Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2 or later (available via download to pur-  
chasers of Nikon Capture 4) can be used to define a custom tone  
curve and download it to the camera. Choose Custom to select this  
user-defined curve. If no custom curve has been created, this option  
is equivalent to Normal.  
Custom  
Highlight Tone compensation in the shoot-  
ing menu ( 158) and press the multi selector  
to the right.  
1
2
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
66  
Suiting Colors to a Workflow: Color Mode  
Color mode determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.  
Choose a color mode according to how photographs will be processed on  
leaving the camera.  
Option  
Description  
Choose for portrait shots that will be printed or used “as is,”  
with no further modification. Photographs are adapted to  
sRGB color space.  
I (sRGB)  
(default)  
I
Photos are adapted to Adobe RGB color space, which can  
express wider gamut of colors than sRGB. Choose for images  
that will be extensively processed or retouched.  
II II (Adobe RGB)  
Choose for nature or landscape shots that will be printed or  
used “as is,” with no further modification. Photographs are  
adapted to sRGB color space.  
III III (sRGB)  
Highlight Color mode in the shooting menu  
158) and press the multi selector to the  
right.  
1
2
(
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
67  
Color Mode  
Modes I and III are recommended when taking photographs that will be printed with-  
out modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management, or  
when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing op-  
tion on some household printers, or kiosk printing or other commercial print services.  
Photographs taken in Mode II can also be printed using these options, but colors will  
not be as vivid.  
JPEG photographs taken in Mode II are Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 compliant; applications  
and printers that support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 will select the correct color space  
automatically. If the application or device does not support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0,  
select the appropriate color space manually. An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF  
photographs taken in Mode II, allowing applications that support color management  
to automatically select the correct color space. For more information, see the docu-  
mentation provided with the application or device.  
Nikon Software  
Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later (available via download to purchasers of Nikon  
Capture 4) and PictureProject automatically select the correct color space when open-  
ing photographs created with the D2Hs.  
68  
Controlling Color: Hue Adjustment  
Hue can be adjusted in the range about –9° to +9° in increments of 3°. If  
red is taken as the starting color, raising hue above 0° (the default setting)  
would introduce a yellow cast, making colors that would be red at a setting  
of 0° appear increasingly orange. Lowering hue below 0° would introduce  
a blue cast, making colors that would be red at a setting of 0° appear in-  
creasingly purple.  
Highlight Hue adjustment in the shooting  
1
2
menu ( 158) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
Hue  
The RGB color model used in digital photographs reproduces colors using differing  
amounts of red, green, and blue light. By mixing two colors of light, a variety of  
different colors can be produced. For example, red combined with a small amount  
of green light produces orange. If red and green are mixed in equal amounts, yel-  
low results, while a smaller amount of red produces a yellow green. Mixing different  
amounts of red and blue light produces colors ranging from a reddish purple through  
purple to navy, while mixing different amounts of green and blue light produces colors  
ranging from emerald to turquoise. (Adding a third color of light results in lighter hues;  
if all three mixed in equal amounts, the results range from white through gray.) When  
this progression of hues is arranged in a circle, the result is known as a color wheel.  
69  
Focus  
Controlling How the Camera Focuses  
This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses:  
focus mode, focus-area selection, and AF-area mode.  
Focus Mode  
Focus mode is controlled by the focus mode  
selector on the front of the camera. There are  
two autofocus (AF) modes, in which the camera  
focuses automatically when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway, and one manual focus  
mode, in which focus must be adjusted manually  
using the focusing ring on the lens:  
Option  
Description  
Camera focuses when shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus  
locks when in-focus indicator () appears in viewfinder, and remains  
locked while shutter-release button is pressed halfway (focus lock).  
Shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator is displayed (fo-  
cus priority). If subject was moving when shutter-release button was  
pressed halfway, camera will track subject until focusing is complete  
S
Single-servo  
AF  
and the shutter can be released (predictive focus tracking;  
71). If  
subject stops moving before shutter is released, in-focus indicator will  
appear in viewfinder and focus will lock at this distance.  
Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. If subject moves, focus will be adjusted to compensate (pre-  
C
Continuous-  
servo AF  
dictive focus tracking;  
71). Photographs can be taken whether or  
not camera is in focus (release priority).  
Camera does not focus automatically; focus must be adjusted manu-  
ally using the lens focusing ring. If maximum aperture of lens is f/5.6  
or faster, viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm focus  
(electronic range finding), but photographs can be taken at any time,  
whether or not camera is in focus.  
M
Manual  
Choosing single-servo AF ensures a sharp, focused image. Continuous-servo  
AF may be a better choice with erratically-moving subjects. Manual focus is  
recommended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus.  
70  
The AF-ON Buttons  
For the purpose of focusing the camera, pressing either of the AF-ON buttons has the  
same effect as pressing the shutter-release button halfway (the AF-ON button for verti-  
cal shooting can only be used when the shutter-release button for vertical shooting is  
unlocked).  
Predictive Focus Tracking  
If the camera autofocus system detects that the subject is moving when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway, it will automatically initiate predictive focus tracking.  
If the subject is moving toward or away from the camera, the camera will track focus  
while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released. In  
single-servo autofocus, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject  
was moving when the shutter-release button was pressed halfway. Focus will lock  
when the subject stops moving. In continuous-servo AF, the camera will also initiate  
predictive focus tracking if the subject starts moving after the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway. Focus will not lock when the subject stops moving.  
Predictive focus tracking is not available in manual focus mode.  
a1—AF-C Mode Priority ( 174)  
If Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C mode priority), photographs can be  
taken in continuous servo-AF only when the camera is in focus. Select FPS rate+ AF  
for improved focus during continuous shooting.  
a2—AF-S Mode Priority ( 174)  
If Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S mode priority), photographs can  
be taken in single servo-AF even when the camera is not in focus.  
a5—AF Activation ( 177)  
If AF-ON only is selected for Custom Setting a5 (AF activation), the camera will only  
focus when one of the AF-ON buttons is pressed, not when the shutter-release button  
is pressed halfway.  
a8—Vertical AF-ON ( 179)  
Custom Setting a8 (Vertical AF-ON) controls whether the AF-ON button for vertical  
shooting is used to initiate autofocus, select the focus area, or both.  
c2—AE-L/AF-L ( 186)  
If desired, the AE-L/AF-L button can perform the same function as the AF-ON button.  
71  
Focus Area Selection  
The D2Hs offers a choice of eleven focus areas that together cover a wide  
area of the frame. The focus area can be selected manually, allowing pho-  
tographs to be composed the main subject positioned almost anywhere in  
the frame, or automatically to ensure that the subject closest to the camera  
is always in focus regardless of where it is the frame (closest-subject priority;  
75). Group dynamic-AF can be used to focus on the closest subject in a  
selected area of the frame ( 75).  
To select the focus area, rotate the focus selector  
lock. The multi selector can then be used to se-  
lect the focus area. The selected focus area is dis-  
played in the top control panel and is highlighted  
briefly in the viewfinder.  
To select the center focus area (or focus area  
group) at any time, press the center of the multi  
selector.  
The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked position following se-  
lection to prevent the selected focus area from changing when the multi  
selector is pressed.  
Focus Area Selection  
The focus area can not be changed during playback or while menus are displayed.  
72  
Focus Area Selection for Portrait (Tall) Orientation Photographs  
If the shutter-release button for vertical shooting is un-  
locked, the focus area can also be selected by pressing  
the AF-ON button for vertical shooting and rotating the  
sub-command dial for vertical shooting. The selected  
focus area is displayed in the top control panel and is  
highlighted briefly in the viewfinder.  
Rotate the sub-command dial clockwise to cycle end-  
lessly through focus areas in the order shown at right,  
counter-clockwise to cycle through focus areas in the  
reverse order.  
10  
8
7
6
9
11  
2
1
4
5
3
a6—Focus Area Illum ( 178)  
Custom Setting a6 (Focus area Illum) controls how long the focus area is illuminated  
in the viewfinder after selection and whether focus areas are displayed in manual focus  
mode or continuous shooting mode.  
a7—Focus Area ( 179)  
This option can be used to set focus area selection to “wrap around.”  
a8—Vertical AF-ON ( 179)  
Custom Setting a8 (Vertical AF-ON) controls whether the AF-ON button for vertical  
shooting is used to initiate autofocus, select the focus area, or both.  
f1—Center Button>Shooting Mode ( 194)  
Depending on the option selected for Center button>Shooting mode (Custom Set-  
ting f1), pressing the center of the multi selector will have no effect or will illuminate  
the selected focus area.  
73  
Autofocus  
When the focus mode selector is set to S (single-servo autofocus) or C (con-  
tinuous-servo autofocus), the camera focuses automatically when the shut-  
ter-release button is pressed halfway. This section describes focus options  
that are only available in single- and continuous-servo AF.  
AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode determines how the focus area is  
selected in autofocus mode. To select the AF-area  
mode, rotate the AF-area mode selector. The se-  
lected mode is shown by an icon in the top control  
panel (see following page).  
a1—AF-C Mode Priority ( 174)  
In focus mode C (continuous-servo autofocus) photographs can be taken even when  
the camera is not in focus (release priority). To ensure that the camera is in focus when  
the picture is taken, choose Focus for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C mode priority). Se-  
lect FPS rate+ AF for improved focus during continuous shooting.  
a2—AF-S Mode Priority ( 174)  
In focus mode S (single-servo autofocus) photographs can be taken only when the  
camera is in focus (focus priority). To allow photographs to be taken regardless of  
whether or not the camera is in focus, choose Release for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S  
mode priority).  
a3—Group Dynamic AF ( 175)  
This option controls how focus areas are grouped in group dynamic-AF mode and  
whether the camera tracks the subject in the center focus area of the selected group.  
a4—Disable Lock-On ( 177)  
This option controls whether the camera immediately adjusts focus to track a subject  
when the distance to the subject changes drastically.  
74  
Mode  
Icon  
Description  
User selects focus area manually; camera focuses on subject in  
selected focus area only. Use for relatively static compositions  
with subjects that will stay in selected focus area.  
Single-  
area AF  
User selects focus area manually, but camera uses information  
from multiple focus areas to determine focus. If subject leaves  
selected focus area even briefly, camera will focus based on  
information from other focus areas (focus area selected in view-  
finder does not change). Use when following erratically moving  
subjects and in other situations in which it is difficult to keep  
subject in selected focus area.  
Dynamic-  
area AF  
User chooses focus area group (see  
right). Camera focuses on center  
of selected group; if subject leaves  
focus area even briefly, camera  
focuses based on information from  
other focus areas in same group.  
Use when subject is moving errati-  
cally but place of subject in overall  
composition is known.  
Top  
Group  
dynamic-  
AF  
Left Center Right  
Bottom  
Camera automatically selects focus area containing subject clos-  
est to camera. Prevents out-of-focus shots when photograph-  
ing erratically moving subjects. Focus area can not be selected  
manually, and focus areas are not displayed in viewfinder or top  
control panel. Camera may be unable to select focus area con-  
taining closest subject when telephoto lens is used or subject is  
poorly lit. Single-area AF is recommended in these cases.  
Dynamic-  
area AF  
with  
closest  
subject  
priority  
Manual Focus  
Single-area AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.  
The Top Control Panel  
The selected focus area or group of focus areas is shown in the top control panel in  
single-area AF, dynamic-area AF, and group dynamic-AF. The illustrations in the “Icon”  
column show the display when the center focus area or focus area group is selected.  
The top control panel display does not show the focus area selected by the camera for  
dynamic-area AF with closest subject priority.  
75  
Summary of Autofocus Options  
Focus mode  
AF-area mode  
Control-panel display  
Focus-area selection  
Single-area AF  
Manual  
Dynamic-area AF  
Manual  
AF-S  
Manual  
(camera focuses on  
center focus area of  
selected group)  
Group dynamic-AF  
Dynamic-area AF  
with closest-  
subject priority  
Automatic  
Manual  
Single-area AF  
Dynamic-area AF  
Manual  
AF-C  
Manual  
(camera focuses on  
center focus area of  
selected group)  
Group dynamic-AF  
Dynamic-area AF  
with closest-  
Automatic  
subject priority  
76  
How it works  
When to use it  
Camera focuses on subject in selected focus frame. Use with static subjects when  
Focus will remain locked while shutter-release button time is available to compose  
is pressed halfway.  
photo.  
Camera focuses on subject in selected focus frame.  
If subject moves before camera has focused, camera  
will focus based on information from other focus  
areas. Focus will remain locked while shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
Use with static subjects when  
time is available to compose  
photo.  
As above, except camera focuses on subject in center Use when sure of subjects  
focus area of selected group. If subject moves before place in overall composition  
camera has focused, camera will focus based on in- but unsure of its exact posi-  
formation from other focus areas in same group.  
tion.  
As above, except that camera selects focus area con- Use when sure that subject  
taining subject closest to camera. If subject moves will be closest object to cam-  
before camera has focused, camera will focus based era but unsure where it will  
on information from other focus areas.  
appear in final composition.  
Camera continues to focus on subject in selected Use with moving subjects that  
focus area while shutter-release button is pressed can be continuously framed  
halfway.  
in single focus area.  
Camera focuses on subject in selected focus area.  
While shutter-release button is pressed halfway, cam-  
era tracks subject as it moves from one focus area to  
the next.  
Use with subjects that are  
moving unpredictably.  
Use when sure of moving  
subjects place in overall  
composition but unsure of its  
exact position.  
As above, except camera focuses on subject in center  
focus area of selected group.  
Use with erratically moving  
subjects when you know  
subject will be closest object  
to camera.  
As above, except that camera selects focus area con-  
taining subject closest to camera.  
77  
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making  
it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus area in the final  
composition. It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to  
focus ( 80).  
In single-servo AF, focus locks automatically when the in-focus indicator ()  
appears in the viewfinder. In continuous-servo AF, focus must be locked  
manually using the AE-L/AF-L button. To recompose a photograph using  
focus lock:  
Position the subject in the selected focus area and press the shutter-re-  
1
lease button halfway to initiate focus.  
Check that the in-focus indicator () appears in the viewfinder.  
2
Single-servo AF  
Focus will lock automatically when the in-  
focus indicator appears, and remain locked  
until you remove your finger from the shutter-  
release button. Focus can also be locked by  
pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (see below).  
Continuous-servo AF  
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock both focus  
and exposure. Focus will remain locked while  
the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if you  
later remove your finger from the shutter-re-  
lease button.  
78  
Recompose the photograph and shoot.  
3
In single-servo AF, focus will remain locked between shots as long as the  
shutter-release button is kept pressed halfway, allowing several photographs  
in succession to be taken at the same focus setting. Focus will also remain  
locked between shots while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus  
lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.  
c2—AE-L/AF-L ( 184)  
This option controls whether the AE-L/AF-L button locks focus and exposure (the de-  
fault setting), focus only, or exposure only.  
79  
Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. If the  
camera is unable to focus using autofocus, use manual focus  
81) or use  
focus lock ( 78) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then  
recompose the photograph.  
AF-Assist Illuminators  
If the subject is dark, a Speedlight with an AF-assist illuminator can be used to assist  
the autofocus.  
80  
Manual Focus  
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not  
support autofocus (non-AF Nikkor lenses) or  
when the autofocus does not produce the desired  
results ( 80). To focus manually, set the focus-  
mode selector to M and adjust the lens focusing  
ring until the image displayed on the clear matte  
field in the viewfinder is in focus. Photographs  
can be taken at any time, even when the image  
is not in focus.  
The Electronic Range Finder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or  
faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can be used  
to confirm whether the subject in the selected fo-  
cus area is in focus. After positioning the subject  
in the active focus area, press the shutter-release  
button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring  
until the in-focus indicator () is displayed.  
A-M Selection/Autofocus with Manual Priority  
When using a lens that offers A-M selection, select M when focusing manually. With  
lenses that support M/A (autofocus with manual priority), focus can be adjusted man-  
ually with the lens set to M or M/A. See the documentation provided with your lens  
for details.  
Focal Plane Position  
To determine the distance between your subject and  
the camera, measure from the focal plane mark on the  
camera body. The distance between the lens mounting  
flange and the focal plane is 46.5mm (1.83˝).  
81  
Exposure  
Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure  
Metering  
The metering method determines how the camera sets exposure:  
Method  
Description  
1,005-pixel RGB sensor sets exposure based on variety of information  
from all areas of frame. With type G or D lens, camera uses 3D color  
matrix metering II for natural results even when frame is dominated by  
bright (white or yellow) or dark (black or dark green) colors. With other  
CPU lenses, 3D range information is not included; instead, camera uses  
color matrix metering II. Color matrix metering is available when focal  
length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lens are specified using Non-  
CPU lens data item in shooting menu ( 121; center-weighted metering  
is used if focal length or aperture is not specified). Matrix metering will  
not produce desired results with autoexposure lock ( 93) or exposure  
compensation ( 95), but is recommended in most other situations.  
3D color  
matrix II/  
Color  
matrix II/  
Color  
matrix  
Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in center  
of frame 8mm (0.31˝) in diameter, shown by corresponding 8-mm refer-  
ence circle in viewfinder. Classic meter for portraits; recommended when  
using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1× ( 237).*  
Center-  
weighted  
Camera meters circle 3mm (0.12˝) in diameter (approximately 2% of  
frame). Circle is centered on current focus area (in group dynamic AF, on  
center focus area of current group;  
74), making it possible to meter  
off-center subjects (if non-CPU lens is used or if dynamic-area AF with  
closest subject priority is in effect, camera will meter center focus area).  
Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is  
much brighter or darker.*  
Spot  
*For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and maximum  
aperture in Non-CPU lens data menu ( 121).  
Before shooting, press the metering selector lock  
button and rotate the metering selector to choose  
a method suited to the composition and lighting  
conditions, and confirm your selection in the  
viewfinder.  
b6—Center Weight ( 183)  
This option controls the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center-  
weighted metering.  
82  
Exposure Mode  
Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture  
when adjusting exposure. Four modes are available: programmed auto (P),  
shutter-priority auto (S), aperture-priority auto (A), and manual (M).  
CPU Lenses  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the aperture ring at the  
minimum aperture (highest f/-number). At other settings, the shutter release will be  
disabled and a blinking  
will appear in the aperture displays in the top control panel  
and viewfinder. Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.  
Depth-of-Field Preview  
To preview the effects of aperture, press and hold the  
depth-of-field preview button. The lens will be stopped  
down to the aperture value selected by the camera  
(modes P and S) or the value chosen by the user (modes  
A and M), allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder (if an optional SB-  
800 or SB-600 Speedlight is attached, a modeling flash will be emitted).  
b1—ISO Auto ( 186)  
When On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto), the camera automatically  
varies sensitivity in the range 200–1600 (ISO equivalent) to help ensure optimum expo-  
sure when the limits of the camera exposure metering system are exceeded (exposure  
modes P, S, and A) or optimum exposure can not be achieved at the shutter-speed and  
aperture selected by the user (exposure mode M). When sensitivity is altered from the  
value selected by the user, ISO-AUTO will flash in the rear control panel and a flashing  
ISO-A will be displayed in the viewfinder. In the camera photo information display for  
pictures taken at altered sensitivities, the ISO value will also be displayed in red. Note  
that noise is more likely to appear in photographs taken at higher sensitivities.  
On can not be selected for ISO auto when sensitivity is set to HI-1 or HI-2; similarly,  
HI-1 or HI-2 can not be selected when ISO auto is on. If a flash is used when ISO  
auto is on, ISO will be fixed at the value selected by the user. If ISO auto is on when  
autoexposure bracketing is selected in exposure mode M, sensitivity will vary around  
the value selected by the user as required by the bracketing program.  
b7—Fine-Tune Exposure ( 189)  
Optimal exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering method (note that  
the exposure compensation icon is not displayed when exposure is fine-tuned).  
e4—Modeling Flash ( 197)  
If Off is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Modeling flash), the optional SB-800 and SB-  
600 will not emit a modeling flash when the depth-of-field preview button is pressed.  
83  
P: Programmed Auto  
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture  
according to a built-in program (see below) for optimal exposure in most  
situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in  
which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture.  
Adjustments can be made using flexible program, exposure compensation  
(
95), and auto exposure bracketing ( 96). Programmed auto is only  
available with CPU lenses.  
To take photographs in programmed auto:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
2
mand dial until P is displayed in the viewfinder  
and top control panel.  
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Exposure mode A (aperture-priority auto) is automatically selected when a non-CPU  
lens is attached. The exposure mode indicator (P) in the top control panel will blink  
and A will be displayed in the viewfinder. For more information, see “Aperture-Priority  
Auto” ( 88).  
Exposure Warning  
If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, one of the following indi-  
cators will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder:  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject too bright. Use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter or lower sensitivity (ISO  
equivalency;  
50).  
Subject too dark. Use optional Speedlight or raise sensitivity (ISO equivalency;  
50).  
84  
Flexible Program  
In programmed auto, different combinations of shutter  
speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main  
command dial (“flexible program”). All combinations  
produce the same exposure. While flexible program is  
in effect, an asterisk (“*”) appears next to the exposure-  
mode indicator in the top control panel. To restore default shutter speed and aperture  
settings, rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed.  
Default settings can also be restored by turning the camera off, selecting another  
exposure mode, performing a two-button reset ( 126), or choosing another setting  
for Custom Setting b3 (EV step;  
181).  
Exposure Program  
The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph:  
ISO 200; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and mini-  
mum aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4 D)  
F1  
F1.4  
F2  
F2.8  
F4  
F5.6  
F8  
F11  
F16  
F22  
F32  
8"  
30" 15"  
4" 2" 1"  
2
4
8
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000  
Shutter speed  
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with sensitivity (ISO equivalency); the  
above graph assumes a sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent. When matrix metering is  
used, values over 171 3 EV are reduced to 171  
/3 EV.  
/
85  
S: Shutter-Priority Auto  
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera  
automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure.  
Shutter speed can be set to values between 30s and 1 8,000 s. Use slow shutter  
speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects, high shutter speeds to  
“freeze” motion. Shutter-priority auto is only available with CPU lenses.  
To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
mand dial until S is displayed in the viewfinder  
and top control panel.  
Rotate the main command dial to choose the  
desired shutter speed.  
2
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
86  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Exposure mode A (aperture-priority auto) is automatically selected when a non-CPU  
lens is attached. The exposure mode indicator (S) in the top control panel will blink  
and A will be displayed in the viewfinder. For more information, see “Aperture-Priority  
Auto” ( 88).  
Changing from Manual to Shutter-Priority Auto  
If you select a shutter speed of  
ter-priority auto without changing the shutter speed, the  
in manual exposure mode and then select shut-  
indicator in the shutter-  
speed display will flash and the shutter can not be released. Rotate the main command  
dial to select a different shutter speed before shooting.  
Exposure Warning  
If the camera is unable to produce the correct exposure at the selected shutter speed,  
the electronic analog exposure display ( 91) in the viewfinder will show the amount  
of under- or over-exposure and one of the following indicators will be displayed in the  
control panel and viewfinder aperture displays:  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject too bright. Choose faster shutter speed or lower sensitivity (ISO equivalency;  
50), or use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter.  
Subject too dark. Choose slower shutter speed or higher sensitivity (ISO equivalency;  
50), or use optional Speedlight.  
Shutter-Speed Lock  
Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting ( 92).  
Long Exp. NR ( 165)  
To reduce noise at shutter speeds of about 1s or slower, select On for the Long exp.  
NR option in the shooting menu. Note that noise and color distortion increase with  
temperature.  
b3—EV Step ( 181)  
This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-  
ments equivalent to 1  
3 EV (the default setting), ½ EV, or 1 EV.  
/
f5—Command Dials>Change Main/Sub ( 198)  
This option can be used to reverse the roles of the command dials so that the sub-com-  
mand dial controls shutter speed, while the main command dial controls aperture.  
87  
A: Aperture-Priority Auto  
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera auto-  
matically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure.  
Small apertures (high f/-numbers) increase depth of field, bringing both the  
main subject and background into focus. Large apertures (low f/-numbers)  
soften background details and let more light into the camera, increasing the  
range of the flash and making photographs less susceptible to blurring.  
To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
mand dial until A is displayed in the viewfinder  
and top control panel.  
Rotate the sub-command dial to choose the  
desired aperture.  
2
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
88  
Non-CPU Lenses  
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified  
using the Non-CPU lens data item in shooting menu  
(
126) when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current  
f/-number will be displayed in the viewfinder and top  
control panel, rounded to the nearest full stop. Other-  
wise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops ( , with maximum ap-  
erture displayed as  
) and the f/-number must be read from the lens aperture ring.  
Exposure Warning  
If the camera is unable to produce the correct exposure at the selected aperture, the  
electronic analog exposure display ( 91) in the viewfinder will show the amount of  
under- or over-exposure and one of the following indicators will be displayed in the  
control panel and viewfinder shutter-speed displays:  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject too bright. Choose smaller aperture (larger f/-number) or lower sensitivity (ISO  
equivalency;  
Subject too dark. Choose larger aperture (smaller f/-number) or higher sensitivity (ISO  
equivalency; 50), or use optional Speedlight.  
50), or use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter.  
Aperture Lock  
Aperture can be locked at the selected setting ( 92).  
b3—EV Step ( 181)  
This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-  
ments equivalent to 1  
3 EV (the default setting), ½ EV, or 1 EV.  
/
f5—Command Dials ( 198)  
Command dials>Change Main/Sub and Command dials>Aperture setting con-  
trol whether aperture is assigned with the main command dial, the sub-command dial,  
or the lens aperture ring. Regardless of the settings chosen, the command dials are  
always used with type G lenses, the lens aperture ring with non-CPU lenses.  
89  
M: Manual  
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture.  
1
Shutter speed can be set to values between 30s and 8,000 s, or the shutter  
can be held open indefinitely for a long time-exposure (  
). Aperture can  
be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens.  
Using the electronic analog exposure display in the viewfinder, you can adjust  
exposure according to shooting conditions and the task at hand.  
To take photographs in manual exposure mode:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main  
1
2
command dial until M is displayed in the view-  
finder and top control panel.  
Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-  
command dial to set aperture. Check exposure in the electronic analog  
exposure displays (see right), and continue to adjust shutter speed and  
aperture until the desired exposure is achieved.  
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
3
Long Time-Exposures  
At a shutter speed of  
, the shutter will remain open while the shutter-release  
button is held down. Nikon recommends using a fully-charged EN-EL4 battery or an  
optional EH-6 AC adapter to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open. Note that  
if the shutter is open for more than approximately ½s at any setting, “noise” in the  
form of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels may appear in the final photograph.  
AF Micro Nikkor Lenses  
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need only be  
taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture.  
90  
Non-CPU Lenses  
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been speci-  
fied using the Non-CPU lens data item in shooting  
menu (  
121) when a non-CPU lens is attached,  
the current f/-number will be displayed in the view-  
finder and top control panel, rounded to the near-  
est full stop. Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops  
(
, with maximum aperture displayed as  
) and the f/-number must be read from  
the lens aperture ring.  
Electronic Analog Exposure Displays  
The electronic analog exposure displays in the top control panel and viewfinder show  
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings. De-  
pending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b3 (EV step), the amount of under-  
1
or over-exposure is shown in increments of  
/
3 EV, ½ EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the  
exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash.  
“EV step” set to “1/3 step”  
View-  
“EV step” set to “1/2 step”  
View-  
“EV step” set to “1 step”  
View-  
Top control panel finder  
Top control panel  
finder  
Top control panel  
finder  
Optimal exposure  
Underexposed by 1  
/
3 EV  
Underexposed by ½EV  
Underexposed by 1EV  
Overexposed by more than 3EV*  
*At 1/3 step,  
appears in the viewfinder when overexposure exceeds 2EV.  
Long Exp. NR ( 165)  
To reduce noise at shutter speeds of about 1s or slower, select On for the Long exp.  
NR option in the shooting menu. Note that noise and color distortion increase with  
temperature.  
b3—EV Step ( 181)  
This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-  
ments equivalent to 1  
3 EV (the default setting), ½ EV, or 1 EV.  
/
f5—Command Dials ( 198)  
Command dials>Change Main/Sub and Command dials>Aperture setting con-  
trol whether aperture is assigned with the main command dial, the sub-command dial,  
or the lens aperture ring. Regardless of the settings chosen, the command dials are  
always used with type G lenses, the lens aperture ring with non-CPU lenses.  
91  
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock  
The button can be used to lock shutter speed at the value selected in shut-  
ter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, or to lock aperture at the value  
selected in aperture-priority auto and manual exposure modes. Lock is not  
available in programmed auto.  
Shutter-Speed Lock  
To lock shutter speed at the selected value, press the button and rotate the  
main command dial until shutter-speed lock icons appear in the viewfinder  
and the top control panel.  
To unlock shutter speed, press the  
button and rotate the main command  
dial until the lock icons disappear from the displays.  
Aperture Lock  
To lock aperture at the selected value, press the  
button and rotate the  
sub-command dial until aperture lock icons appear in the viewfinder and the  
top control panel.  
To unlock aperture, press the  
button and rotate the sub-command dial  
until the lock icons disappear from the displays.  
92  
Autoexposure Lock  
When center-weighted metering is used, an area in the center of the frame  
is assigned the greatest weight when determining exposure. Similarly, when  
spot metering is used, exposure is based upon lighting conditions in the se-  
lected focus area. If the subject is not in the metered area when the picture  
is taken, exposure will be based on lighting conditions in the background,  
and the main subject may be under- or over-exposed. To prevent this, use  
autoexposure lock:  
Select center-weighted or spot metering. If  
1
2
using center-weighted metering, select the  
center focus area with the multi selector (  
72).  
Position the subject in the selected focus area and press the shutter-re-  
lease button halfway. With the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
and the subject positioned in the focus area, press the AE-L/AF-L button  
to lock exposure (and focus, except in manual focus mode). Confirm that  
the in-focus indicator () appears in the viewfinder.  
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will appear in the  
viewfinder.  
93  
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photograph and  
3
shoot.  
Metered Area  
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 3-mm (0.12˝) circle  
centered on the selected focus area. In center-weighted metering, exposure will be  
locked at the value metered in an 8-mm (0.31˝) circle at the center of the viewfinder.  
Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed without altering  
the metered value for exposure:  
Exposure mode  
Programmed auto  
Shutter-priority auto  
Aperture-priority auto  
Settings  
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program;  
Shutter speed  
85)  
Aperture  
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel. Note that the  
metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect (changes to  
metering take effect when the lock is released).  
c1—AE Lock ( 184)  
If +Release Button is selected for AE lock, exposure will lock when the shutter-re-  
lease button is pressed halfway.  
c2—AE-L/AF-L ( 184)  
Depending on the option selected, the AE-L/AF-L button locks both focus and exposure  
(the default setting), only focus, or only exposure. Options are available for keeping  
exposure locked until the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed a second time, the shutter is  
released, or exposure meters turn off.  
94  
Exposure Compensation  
To obtain the desired results with certain subject compositions, it may be  
necessary to use exposure compensation to alter exposure from the value  
suggested by the camera. As a rule of thumb, positive compensation may  
be needed when the main subject is darker than the background, negative  
values when the main subject is brighter than the background.  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the main  
1
command dial and confirm exposure com-  
pensation in the top control panel or the  
viewfinder (in the viewfinder, positive values  
are shown by a  
icon, negative values by a  
icon). Exposure compensation can be set  
to values between –5EV (underexposure) and  
+5EV (overexposure) in increments of 1 3 EV.  
0EV (  
button pressed)  
–0.3EV  
At values other than 0, the 0 at the center  
of the electronic analog exposure displays  
will flash and a  
the control panel and viewfinder after you  
release the button. The current value for  
icon will be displayed in  
+2.0EV  
exposure compensation can be confirmed in  
the electronic analog exposure display or by  
pressing the  
button.  
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.  
2
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 or  
performing a two button reset ( 126). Exposure compensation is not reset  
when the camera is turned off.  
b4—Exposure Comp. EV ( 181)  
Use this option to set the increments for exposure compensation to ½ or 1EV.  
b5—Exposure Comp. ( 182)  
If desired, exposure compensation can be set without pressing the  
button.  
95  
Bracketing  
The D2Hs offers three types of bracketing: exposure bracketing, flash brack-  
eting, and white balance bracketing. In exposure bracketing, the camera  
varies exposure compensation with each shot, while in the case of flash  
bracketing, flash level is varied with each shot (i-TTL and auto aperture flash  
control modes only;  
105, 107). Only one photograph is produced each  
time the shutter is released, meaning that several shots (up to nine) are re-  
quired to complete the bracketing sequence. Exposure and flash bracketing  
are recommended in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure and there  
is not enough time to check results and adjust settings with each shot.  
In white balance bracketing, the camera creates multiple images each time  
the shutter is released, each with a different white balance adjustment (  
101). Only one shot is required to complete the bracketing sequence. White  
balance bracketing is recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or  
experimenting with different white balance settings. White balance bracket-  
ing is not available at white-balance settings of  
(Choose color temp.) or  
(preset) or at image qualities of NEF (Raw), NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG  
Normal, or NEF+JPEG Basic.  
Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
Select the type of bracketing to be performed  
1
2
using Custom Setting e5 (Auto BKT set;  
192). Choose AE & flash to vary both ex-  
posure and flash level (the default setting), AE  
only to vary only exposure, or Flash only to  
vary only flash level.  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the main command dial to choose the  
number of shots in the bracketing sequence ( 98–100). At settings  
other than zero, a BKT icon and bracketing indicator will be displayed in  
the top control panel, and a BKT icon will appear in the viewfinder.  
96  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the  
3
4
exposure increment ( 98–100).  
Compose a photograph, focus, and shoot. The camera will vary ex-  
posure and/or flash level shot-by-shot according to the bracketing pro-  
gram selected. Modifications to exposure are added to those made with  
exposure compensation ( 95), making it possible to achieve exposure  
compensation values of more than 5EV.  
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be  
displayed in the top control panel. A segment will disappear from the  
indicator after each shot.  
To cancel bracketing, press the  
mand dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero  
and is no longer displayed in the control panel on top of the camera.  
button and rotate the main com-  
The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button  
reset ( 126), although in this case the bracketing program will not be  
restored the next time bracketing is activated. Selecting WB bracketing  
for Custom Setting e5 cancels the current the bracketing program.  
Shooting Mode  
In single frame and self-timer modes, one shot will be taken each time the shutter-  
release button is pressed. In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes,  
shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have  
been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
e8—Auto BKT Selection ( 194)  
If desired, the main command dial can be used to turn bracketing on and off and the  
sub-command dial to select both the number of shots and the exposure increment.  
97  
The bracketing programs available depend on the option selected for Cus-  
tom Setting b3 (EV step; 181).  
1/3 Step Selected for EV Step  
Control panel  
display  
No. of Exposure  
shots increment  
Bracketing  
order (EVs)  
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9
9
9
+
+
/
3 EV  
+0.3, 0, +0.7  
+0.7, 0, +1.3  
2
/
3 EV  
+1EV  
+1.0, 0, +2.0  
1
/
3 EV  
–0.3, –0.7, 0  
2
/
3 EV  
–0.7, –1.3, 0  
1EV  
–1.0, –2.0, 0  
1
+
+
/
3 EV  
0, +0.3  
2
/
3 EV  
0, +0.7  
+1EV  
0, +1.0  
1
/
3 EV  
0, –0.3  
2
/
3 EV  
0, –0.7  
1EV  
0, –1.0  
1
/
3 EV  
0, –0.3, +0.3  
2
/
3 EV  
0, –0.7, +0.7  
1EV  
0, –1.0, +1.0  
1
/
3 EV  
0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7  
0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3  
0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0  
0, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0  
0, –2.0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3, +2.0  
0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0  
0,1.3,1.0,0.7,0.3,+0.3,+0.7,+1.0,+1.3  
0,2.7,2.0,1.3,0.7,+0.7,+1.3,+2.0,+2.7  
0,4.0,3.0,2.0,1.0,+1.0,+2.0,+3.0,+4.0  
2
/
3 EV  
1EV  
1
/
3 EV  
2
/
3 EV  
1EV  
1
/
3 EV  
2
/
3 EV  
1EV  
98  
1/2 Step Selected for EV Step  
Control panel  
display  
No. of Exposure  
shots increment  
Bracketing  
order (EVs)  
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
5
5
7
7
+½EV  
+1EV  
½EV  
1EV  
+½EV  
+1EV  
½EV  
1EV  
½EV  
1EV  
+0.5, 0, +1.0  
+1.0, 0, +2.0  
–0.5, –1.0, 0  
–1.0, –2.0, 0  
0, +0.5  
0, +1.0  
0, –0.5  
0, –1.0  
0, –0.5, +0.5  
0, –1.0, +1.0  
½EV  
1EV  
0, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0  
0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0  
0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0, +1.5  
0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0  
0,2.0,1.5,1.0,0.5,+0.5,+1.0,+1.5,+2.0  
0,4.0,3.0,2.0,1.0,+1.0,+2.0,+3.0,+4.0  
½EV  
1EV  
9
9
½EV  
1EV  
99  
1 Step Selected for EV Step  
Control panel  
display  
No. of Exposure  
shots increment  
Bracketing  
order (EVs)  
3
3
2
2
3
5
7
9
+1EV  
1EV  
+1EV  
1EV  
1EV  
+1.0, 0, +2.0  
–1.0, –2.0, 0  
0, +1.0  
0, –1.0  
0, –1.0, +1.0  
1EV  
0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0  
0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0  
0, –4.0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0, +4.0  
1EV  
1EV  
Resuming Exposure or Flash Bracketing  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting  
can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been  
replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera  
is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume  
from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (programmed  
auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed (aperture-priority auto, manual  
exposure mode). When On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) and no  
Speedlight is attached, the camera will automatically vary sensitivity for optimum ex-  
posure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded in programmed  
auto, shutter-priority auto, or aperture-priority exposure mode. If Custom Setting e5  
(Auto BKT set) is set AE only or to AE & Flash with no Speedlight attached and On  
is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto), the camera will vary sensitivity without  
varying shutter speed or aperture, regardless of the setting chosen for Custom Setting  
e6 (see below).  
e6—Manual Mode Bkting ( 193)  
This option controls how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in man-  
ual exposure mode. Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with  
shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone.  
e7—Auto BKT Order ( 193)  
This option can be used to change the bracketing order.  
100  
White Balance Bracketing  
Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting  
1
2
e5 (Auto BKT set;  
192).  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the main command dial to choose the  
number of shots in the bracketing sequence ( 103). At settings other  
than zero, a icon and bracketing indicator will appear in the top  
control panel. The rear control panel will show and the view-  
finder  
.
If the number of shots in the bracketing pro-  
gram is greater than the number of exposures  
remaining, a flashing icon will appear in the  
top control panel and the frame count and  
number of exposures remaining will flash. A  
flashing  
indicator will appear in the view-  
finder and the shutter release will be disabled.  
Shooting can begin when a new memory card  
is inserted.  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the  
3
white balance adjustment ( 103). Each increment is roughly equivalent  
to 10 mired.  
101  
Compose a photograph, focus, and shoot. Each shot will be processed  
to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program, and  
each copy will have a different white balance. Modifications to white  
balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white  
balance fine-tuning ( 54).  
4
To cancel bracketing, press the  
button and rotate the main command  
dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero and  
white-balance bracketing indicators are no longer displayed in the control  
panels and viewfinder. The program last in effect will be restored the next  
time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by per-  
forming a two-button reset ( 126), although in this case the bracketing  
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.  
White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing is not available at white-balance settings of  
(Choose  
color temp.) or (preset) or at an image quality of NEF (RAW). Selecting NEF  
(Raw), NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal, or NEF+JPEG Basic cancels white bal-  
ance bracketing.  
Shooting Mode  
In single frame and self-timer modes, the number of copies specified in the white  
balance program will be created each time the shutter is released. In continuous low  
speed and continuous high speed modes, only one shot will be taken each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed. Each shot will be processed to create the number of  
copies specified in the bracketing program.  
Turning the Camera Off  
If the camera is turned off while the camera while the memory card access lamp is  
lit, the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been  
recorded. To turn the camera off without recording the remaining photographs, press  
the button while turning the camera off (keep the button pressed for at least one  
second after turning the camera off).  
e8—Auto BKT Selection ( 194)  
If desired, the main command dial can be used to turn bracketing on and off and the  
sub-command dial to select both the number of shots and the white-balance incre-  
ment.  
102  
The number of shots, white balance (WB) increment, and bracketing order for  
each of the possible white-balance bracketing programs is shown below.  
Control panel  
display  
No. of  
shots increment  
WB  
Bracketing  
order  
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9
9
9
+1  
+2  
+3  
–1  
–2  
–3  
+1  
+2  
+3  
–1  
–2  
–3  
1
+1, 0, +2  
+2, 0, +4  
+3, 0, +6  
–1, –2, 0  
–2, –4, 0  
–3, –6, 0  
0, +1  
0, +2  
0, +3  
0, –1  
0, –2  
0, –3  
0, –1, +1  
2
0, –2, +2  
3
0, –3, +3  
1
0, –2, –1, +1, +2  
0, –4, –2, +2, +4  
0, –6, –3, +3, +6  
0, –3, –2, –1, +1, +2, +3  
0, –6, –4, –2, +2, +4, +6  
0, –9, –6, –3, +3, +6, +9  
0, –4, –3, –2, –1, +1, +2, +3, +4  
0, –8, –6, –4, –2, +2, +4, +6, +8  
0, –12, –9, –6, –3, +3, +6, +9, +12  
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
e7—Auto BKT Order ( 193)  
This option can be used to change the bracketing order.  
103  
Flash Photography  
Using Optional Speedlights  
The D2Hs supports flash photography when an optional Speedlight is  
mounted on the cameras accessory shoe. A flash can be used not only when  
natural lighting is inadequate, but also to fill in shadows, illuminate back-lit  
subjects, and even to add a catch light to the eyes of a portrait subject.  
When used with an SB-800 or SB-600 Speedlight (available separately;  
237), the D2Hs supports the full range of options available with the Nikon  
Creative Lighting System (CLS), including Advanced Wireless Lighting, i-TTL  
flash control ( 105), FV Lock ( 112), Flash Color Information Communica-  
tion ( 52), and Auto FP High-Speed Sync. See the Speedlight manual for  
details.  
Modeling Illumination  
SB-800 and SB-600 Speedlights emit a modeling flash when the camera depth-of-field  
preview button is pressed. This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting  
to preview the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units. Modeling illumi-  
nation can be turned off using Custom Setting e4 (Modeling flash;  
191).  
104  
TTL Flash Control  
TTL flash control is available only with optional SB-series 800, 600, 80DX,  
28DX, and 50DX Speedlights.  
SB-800, SB-600: i-TTL Flash Control  
When the SB-800 or SB-600 is set to TTL, the camera automatically selects  
one of the following types of flash control:  
i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Speedlight emits series of nearly invisible  
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash. Preflashes reflected  
from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by five-segment TTL flash control  
sensor or 1,005-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with information  
from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between  
main subject and ambient background lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance  
information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation can  
be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum  
aperture;  
121–124). Not available when spot metering is used.  
Standard i-TTL Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame  
to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into account. Recom-  
mended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background  
details, or when exposure compensation is used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR  
is activated automatically when spot metering is selected.  
105  
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-50DX: D-TTL Flash Control  
The type of flash control used with the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX  
depends on the lens attached:  
Lens  
Description  
3D Multi-Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Speedlight emits series  
of nearly invisible preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main  
flash. Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up  
by five-segment TTL flash control sensor and analyzed in combination with  
range information from lens to adjust flash output for natural balance be-  
tween main subject and ambient background lighting. Not available when  
spot metering is used.  
Type  
G or D  
lens  
Multi-Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: As above, except that  
range information is not included in regulating flash output. Precision of  
calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (fo-  
Other  
lenses  
cal length and maximum aperture;  
metering is used.  
121–124). Not available when spot  
Standard TTL Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in  
frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into account.  
Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense  
of background details, or when exposure compensation is used. Standard  
TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is  
selected.  
All  
types  
106  
Compatible Speedlights  
The following Speedlights support TTL flash control:  
Speedlight  
Advanced  
Wireless Lighting  
SB-80DX  
SB-800 SB-600 SB-800 SB-6001 SB-28DX SB-50DX  
Flash mode/feature  
i-TTL2  
D-TTL3  
Auto aperture4  
TTL  
5
6
AA  
A
5
7
8
Non-TTL auto  
GN Range-priority manual  
Manual  
M
9
FP high-speed sync  
Repeating flash  
REAR  
Rear-curtain sync  
Red-eye reduction  
Flash Color Information  
Communication  
10  
Auto FP High-Speed Sync11  
FV Lock  
AF-assist for multi-area AF12  
1 Functions as remote flash only.  
4 Not available with non-CPU lenses unless lens data  
2 Standard i-TTL for Digital SLR is used with spot meter-  
have been specified using Non-CPU lens data.  
ing or when selected with Speedlight. When using 5 Use Speedlight controls to select flash mode.  
non-CPU lens with i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital 6 Select On for Custom Setting e3 (AA flash mode;  
SLR, improved precision can be obtained if lens data  
191).  
are specified in Non-CPU lens data menu.  
7 Available only if non-CPU lens is used without speci-  
3 Standard TTL Flash for Digital SLR is used with spot  
fying lens data in Non-CPU lens data menu.  
metering. In other metering modes, flash control 8 Select Off for Custom Setting e3 (AA flash  
depends on lens type: mode; 191).  
Type G or D Nikkor (excluding IX Nikkor): 3D 9 Set Speedlight to mode M and select FP high-speed  
Multi Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR sync manually.  
Other Nikkor (excludingAF Nikkor lenses for F3AF): 10 Only available when SB-800 is used as master flash.  
Multi Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR (when 11 Select 1/250 (Auto FP) for Custom Setting e1  
using non-CPU lens, specify lens data in Non-CPU  
(Flash sync speed; 190).  
lens data menu for improved precision)  
12 Available with AF CPU lenses only.  
107  
The following Speedlights can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes.  
If they are set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button will lock and no  
photographs can be taken.  
Speedlight  
SB-30  
SB-22S  
SB-22  
SB-20  
SB-23  
SB-293  
SB-28  
SB-21B3 SB-16B SB-114  
Flash mode  
SB-261 SB-272 SB-25 SB-24 SB-29S3 SB-15 SB-144  
A
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
M
5
5
FP high-speed sync  
Repeating flash  
REAR Rear-curtain sync  
Red-eye reduction  
1 The SB-26 can be set to remote mode for wireless remote flash photography. When the wireless remote selector  
is set to D, shutter speed will be set to under ½00 s.  
2 When an SB-27 is mounted on the D2Hs, the flash mode is automatically set to TTL, and the shutter-release will  
be disabled. Set the SB-27 to A (non-TTL auto flash).  
3 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60mm, 105mm, 200mm, or 70–180mm).  
4 When using the SB-11 or SB-14 in A or M mode, use the SU-2 with an SC-13 sync cable. Although SC-11 and  
SC-15 sync cables can be used, the flash-ready indicator will not appear in the viewfinder and shutter speed will  
not be adjusted automatically.  
5 Set Speedlight to mode M and select FP high-speed sync manually.  
Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon Speedlights. Negative voltages or voltages over 250V applied to the  
accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry  
of the camera or flash. Before using a Nikon Speedlight not included in the list on  
these pages, contact a Nikon-authorized service representative for more information.  
ISO Auto  
If a Speedlight is used when Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on, sensitivity (ISO equiv-  
alency) will be fixed at the value selected by the user.  
108  
Notes on Optional Speedlights  
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the Speedlight supports  
i-TTL or D-TTL flash control, refer to the entry for cameras that support the Creative  
Lighting System (CLS) or for digital SLR cameras in the table of camera types.  
If Auto FP High-Speed Sync is not used, the shutter will synchronize with an external  
flash at speeds of ½50 s or slower.  
If the flash-ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken  
with i-TTL or D-TTL flash control, the flash has fired at full power and the photograph  
may be underexposed.  
The SB-28DX displays exposure in increments of 1/3 EV. If the camera is set to control  
exposure in increments of ½EV using Custom Setting b2, the SB-28DX exposure dis-  
play will not show the correct ISO value. The actual exposure value is not affected.  
i-TTL and D-TTL flash control can be used to adjust flash output at sensitivity (ISO  
equivalency) settings between 200 and 1600. At settings of HI-1 and HI-2, the desired  
results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings.  
The AF-assist illuminator on SB-series 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27, 26, and 24 Speedlights will  
only light if all of the following conditions are met: focus mode is set to single-servo  
auto, an AF-Nikkor lens is used, the subject is poorly lit, and the center focus area is  
selected or dynamic-area AF is used in combination with closest-subject priority.  
In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f/-number) is limited ac-  
cording to sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below:  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:  
200  
250  
320  
400  
500  
640  
800  
1000  
1250  
1600  
4
4.2  
4.5  
4.8  
5
5.3  
5.6  
6
6.3  
6.7  
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped  
down by half an f/-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given  
above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography,  
correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL or D-TTL mode. We recommend that  
you choose spot metering to select standard i-TTL or D-TTL flash control. Take a test  
shot and view the results in the monitor.  
In i-TTL or D-TTL mode, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with your  
Speedlight. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce  
incorrect exposure.  
D-TTL flash control can not be used for multi-flash photography.  
109  
Flash Sync Modes  
The D2Hs supports the following flash sync modes:  
Flash sync mode  
Description  
This mode is recommended for most situations. In pro-  
grammed auto and aperture-priority auto modes, shutter  
1
speed will automatically be set to values between /60 and  
½50 s (1/60 to 1/8,000 s with Auto FP High-Speed Sync).  
Front-curtain sync  
Flash is combined with speeds as slow as 30s to capture  
both subject and background at night or under dim light.  
This mode is only available in programmed auto and aper-  
ture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of tripod is recom-  
mended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.  
Slow sync  
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, flash fires  
just before the shutter closes, creating effect of a stream  
of light behind moving objects. In programmed auto and  
aperture-priority auto, slow rear-curtain sync is used to cap-  
ture both subject and background. Use of tripod is recom-  
Rear-curtain sync  
Slow rear-curtain sync mended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.  
In this mode (available only with SB-series 800, 600, 80DX,  
28DX, 28, 27, 26, and 25 Speedlights), red-eye reduction  
pre-flash lights for approximately one second before main  
flash. Pupils in subjects eyes to contract, reducing “red-eye”  
effect sometimes caused by flash.  
Red-eye reduction  
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. This mode is  
only available with SB-series 800, 600, 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27,  
26, and 25 Speedlights in programmed auto and aperture-  
priority auto exposure modes. Use of a tripod is recom-  
mended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.  
Red-eye reduction  
with slow sync  
SB-Series 26, 25, and 24 Speedlights  
Front- and rear-curtain sync modes for SB-series 26, 25, and 24 Speedlights are set  
using the sync mode selector on the optional Speedlight. Camera red-eye reduction  
settings take priority over mode selected with SB-26 and SB-25.  
Studio Flash Systems  
Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems, as the correct synchro-  
nization can not be obtained.  
110  
To choose the flash sync mode, press the  
but-  
ton and rotate the main command dial until the  
desired flash sync mode is selected in the top  
control panel:  
1Available only in exposure modes P and A. In modes S and M, (front-curtain sync)  
is selected when button is released.  
2In exposure modes P and A, flash-sync mode will be set to (slow rear-curtain sync)  
when the button is released.  
3
icon blinks if Speedlight does not support red-eye reduction.  
4Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure modes P and A. In  
modes S and M, (red-eye reduction) is selected when the button is released.  
Shutter Speed and Aperture  
Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when a Speedlight is used:  
Exposure mode  
Programmed auto  
Shutter-priority auto  
Aperture-priority auto  
Manual  
Shutter speed  
Set automatically by camera1, 2  
½50 s–30s2  
Set automatically by camera1, 2  
½50 s–30s 2  
Aperture  
84  
86  
88  
90  
Set automatically by camera  
Value selected by user3  
1Set automatically in the range ½50 s–1/60 s, or ½50 s–30s at flash sync settings of slow  
sync, slow rear-curtain sync, and red-eye reduction with slow sync.  
2If 1/250 (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed) when an op-  
tional SB-800 or SB-600 Speedlight is used, shutter speeds may be as fast as 1/8,000 s.  
3Flash range varies with aperture. When setting aperture in exposure modes A and  
M, consult the table of flash ranges provided with optional Speedlight.  
e1—Flash Sync Speed ( 190)  
This option can be used to enable Auto FP High-Speed Sync or limit the fastest sync  
speed to a speed slower than ½50 s. To x shutter speed at the sync speed limit in ex-  
posure modes S and M, select the setting after the slowest possible shutter speed (30s  
or  
). An X will be displayed in the flash sync indicator in the top control panel.  
e2—Flash Shutter Speed ( 190)  
This option can be used to limit the slowest shutter speed possible when using an op-  
tional Speedlight in programmed auto and aperture-priority auto exposure modes.  
111  
FV Lock  
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to be re-  
composed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output  
is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the  
center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes  
in sensitivity (ISO equivalency), aperture, and Speedlight zoom head position.  
FV lock is available with SB-800 and SB-600 Speedlights only.  
To use FV lock:  
Select FV Lock or FV Lock/Lens data for  
1
Custom Setting f4 (FUNC. button;  
197).  
Mount an SB-800 or SB-600 Speedlight on the camera accessory shoe.  
2
3
4
Turn the Speedlight on and set the flash mode to TTL or AA (see the  
Speedlight instruction manual for details).  
Position the subject in the center of the frame  
and press the shutter-release button halfway  
to focus.  
Press the camera FUNC. button. The Speed-  
light will emit a monitor preflash to determine  
the appropriate flash level. Flash output will be  
locked at this level and FV lock icons (  
5
and  
) will appear in the control panel and  
viewfinder.  
112  
Recompose the photograph and press the  
shutter-release button the rest of the way  
down to shoot. If desired, additional pictures  
can be taken without releasing FV lock.  
6
7
Press the camera FUNC. button to release  
FV lock and confirm that the FV lock icons  
(
and  
) are no longer displayed in  
the control panel and viewfinder.  
Metering  
The metering areas for FV lock are as follows:  
Speedlight  
Flash mode  
Metered area  
5-mm circle in center of frame  
Area metered by Speedlight exposure meter  
Entire frame  
TTL  
AA  
TTL  
AA  
Stand-alone flash unit  
Used with other flash units  
(Advanced Wireless  
Lighting)  
Area metered by Speedlight exposure meter  
AA (master flash)  
113  
Flash Contacts and Indicators  
The D2Hs is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching Speedlights direct-  
ly to the camera and a sync terminal that allows Speedlights to be connected  
via a sync cable. When a Speedlight is connected, the flash-ready indicator in  
the viewfinder shows whether the flash is fully charged and ready for use.  
The Accessory Shoe  
SB-series Speedlights, including the SB-800, 600,  
80DX, 28DX, 50DX, 27, 23, 22s, and 29s, can  
be mounted directly on the camera accessory  
shoe without a sync cable. The accessory shoe is  
equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a  
locking pin (e.g., SB-series 80DX and 27).  
The Sync Terminal  
A sync cable can be connected to the sync  
terminal as required. Do not connect another  
Speedlight via a sync cable when performing rear-  
curtain sync flash photography with an SB-series  
Speedlights such as the 800, 600, 80DX, 28DX,  
50DX, 27, 23, 22s, or 29s mounted on the cam-  
era accessory shoe.  
The Flash-Ready Indicator  
When an SB-series Speedlight such as the 800, 600, 80DX, 28DX, 50DX, 27,  
23, 22s, or 29s is connected, the flash-ready indicator will light when the  
flash is fully charged and ready for use. If the indicator blinks for approxi-  
mately three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or D-TTL modes,  
the flash has fired at full output and the photograph may be underexposed.  
Check the results in the monitor. If the photograph is underexposed, adjust  
the distance to the subject, aperture, or flash range and try again.  
114  
Interval Timer Photography  
Taking Photographs at Preset Intervals  
The D2Hs is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.  
Highlight Intvl timer shooting in the shoot-  
1
2
ing menu ( 158) and press the multi selector  
to the right.  
Press the multi selector left or right to high-  
light options and press the multi selector up or  
down to change interval timer settings. The  
selected option is highlighted in blue. The fol-  
lowing options are available:  
Option  
Description  
Choose starting for interval timer photography from:  
Now: Shooting begins about 3s after this option is selected  
Start time: Shooting begins at Start time  
Start  
Enter start time for interval timer photography when Start time  
is selected for Start. Press multi selector left or right to highlight  
starting hour or minute, press up or down to change. Not avail-  
able when Now is selected for Start.  
Start time  
Interval  
Enter time between shots. Press multi selector left or right to  
highlight hour, minute, or second, press up or down to change.  
Note that camera will not be able to take photographs at speci-  
fied interval if interval is shorter than shutter speed or time re-  
quired to record images.  
Choose number of intervals and number of shots taken at each  
interval. Press multi selector left or right to highlight number of  
intervals or number of shots, press up or down to change. Total  
number of shots that will be taken appears to right.  
Select  
intvl*no. of  
shots  
Remaining Shows number of intervals and total shots remaining in current  
(intvl*shots) interval program. This item can not be edited.  
Choose Off to exit without starting interval timer. To start inter-  
val timer, select On and press . Shooting will start at selected  
start time and will continue for specified number of intervals.  
Start  
115  
Highlight Start at the bottom of the interval timer menu and press the  
multi selector up or down to select On, then press the button. The  
first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time. Shooting  
will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken. If  
shooting can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter  
3
speed of  
is currently selected in manual exposure mode, or the  
starting time is less than one minute from the current time), a warning  
will appear and the interval timer menu will be displayed again.  
Use of a tripod is recommended.  
Take a Test Shot  
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and  
view the results in the monitor. Remember that the camera will focus before each  
shot—no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF.  
Use a Reliable Power Source  
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged. If in  
doubt, charge the battery before shooting or use an optional EH-6 AC adapter.  
Check the Time  
Before choosing a starting time, select World Time in the setup menu and make sure  
that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date ( 18).  
Out of Memory  
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be  
taken. Delete some pictures or turn the camera off and insert another memory card.  
When the camera is turned on, interval timer photography will be paused. See “Paus-  
ing Interval Timer Photography” on the following page for information on resuming  
interval timer photography.  
Bracketing  
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography. If exposure  
and/or flash bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the cam-  
era will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval, regardless  
of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance brack-  
eting is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take the  
number of shots specified in the interval timer menu and process each shot to create  
the number of copies specified in the bracketing program.  
The Viewfinder Eyepiece  
In exposure modes other than manual, close the view-  
finder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via the  
viewfinder from interfering with exposure.  
116  
During Shooting  
During interval timer photography, the  
icon in the top control panel will blink. Imme-  
diately before the next shooting interval begins,  
the shutter speed display will show the number of  
intervals remaining, and the aperture display will  
show the number of shots remaining in the current interval. At other times,  
the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval  
can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway (once the but-  
ton is released, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the  
exposure meters turn off).  
To view current interval timer settings, select Intvl  
timer shooting between shots. While interval  
timer photography is in progress, the interval tim-  
er menu will show the starting time, the current  
time, the shooting interval, the selected number  
of intervals and number of shots, and the number  
of intervals and shots remaining. None of these items can be changed while  
interval timer photography is in progress.  
During Shooting  
Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is  
in progress. Note the following:  
• Performing a two-button reset ( 126) or changing bracketing settings ( 96) will  
cancel interval timer photography.  
• If shutter speed is set to  
(manual exposure mode) after the timer has started,  
subsequent photographs will be taken at a shutter speed of 1/3 s.  
• The monitor will turn off about four seconds before each interval.  
• If voice memos are recorded automatically after shooting, voice memos will end two  
seconds before the next photograph is taken.  
C-Mode Max. Shots  
If the number of shots per interval is greater than the limit specified in Custom Setting  
d2 (Maximum shots), only the number of shots specified in Custom Setting d2 will  
be taken at each interval.  
117  
Pausing Interval Timer Photography  
To pause interval timer photography:  
Press the multi selector left or right to high-  
1
2
light Start at the bottom of the interval timer  
menu.  
Press the multi selector up or down to select  
Pause and press the  
button.  
Interval time photography can also be paused by:  
• Pressing the  
button between intervals.  
Turning the camera off (if desired, the memory  
card can be replaced while the camera is off).  
Interval timer photography will be paused when the camera is turned on.  
When shooting is paused, the start time will be reset to Now. A new starting  
time can be selected as described in Step 2 of “Interval Timer Photography”  
(
115). The interval, number of intervals, and number of shots can not be  
changed. If interval timer photography is paused during shooting, any shots  
remaining in the current interval will be cancelled.  
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Start at the bottom of  
1
2
the interval timer menu (see above).  
Press the multi selector up or down to select Resume and press the  
button.  
No Photograph  
Photographs will not be taken if the self-timer is in operation or the previous photo-  
graph has yet to be taken, the memory buffer or memory card is full, or the camera  
is unable to focus in single-servo AF (note that the camera focuses again before each  
shot).  
118  
Interrupting Interval Timer Photography  
To interrupt interval timer photography:  
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Start at the bottom of  
1
2
the interval timer menu (see previous page).  
Press the multi selector up or down to select Done and press the  
ton.  
but-  
Interval timer photography will also be interrupted if:  
• A two button reset is performed ( 126).  
Reset shooting menu is selected in the shooting menu ( 161).  
• Bracketing settings are changed ( 96).  
• The battery is exhausted.  
• The clock battery is exhausted.  
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.  
Shooting Mode  
Regardless of the shooting mode selected, the camera will take the specified number of  
shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high speed) mode, photographs will be taken  
at a rate of eight shots per second. In S (single frame), CL (continuous low-speed), and  
M-UP (mirror up) modes, photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Set-  
ting d1 (Shooting speed;  
186). In  
(self-timer) mode, the shutter-release delay  
applies to each photograph taken. In M-UP mode, the mirror will be raised automatically  
immediately before each shot.  
Shooting Menu Banks  
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks ( 159). If shoot-  
ing menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu item in the shooting  
menu ( 161), interval timer settings will be reset as follows:  
• Start time: Now  
• Interval: 00:01´:00˝  
• Number of intervals: 1  
• Number of shots: 1  
• Start: Off  
119  
Self-Timer Mode  
Delaying Shutter Release  
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-portraits. To  
use the self-timer:  
Mount the camera on a tripod (recommended) or place the camera on a  
1
2
stable, level surface.  
Press the shooting mode dial lock release and  
rotate the shooting mode dial to select  
(self-timer mode).  
Frame the photograph and focus. If autofo-  
cus is in effect, be sure not to block the lens  
when activating the self-timer. In single-servo  
autofocus ( 70), photographs can only be  
taken if the in-focus () indicator appears in  
the viewfinder.  
3
Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter  
In exposure modes other than manual, close  
the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing.  
This prevents light entering via the viewfinder  
from interfering with exposure.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the self-timer.  
The self-timer lamp will start to blink, stopping two seconds before the  
photograph is taken.  
4
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the mode dial  
to another setting.  
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of  
is equivalent to approximately 1/3 s.  
c4—Self-timer ( 185)  
Self-timer delay can be set to 2s, 5s, 10s (the default setting), or 20s.  
120  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Specifying Lens Data  
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user  
can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non-CPU  
lens. If the focal length of the lens is known:  
• Automatic power zoom can be used with attached Speedlights  
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info dis-  
play  
When the maximum aperture of the lens is known:  
• The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder  
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture  
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display  
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:  
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to use center-  
weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses,  
including Reflex-Nikkor lenses)  
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering, i-TTL Bal-  
anced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR, and Multi-Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for  
Digital SLR  
Specifying Lens Focal Length  
Lens focal length can be specified using the Non-CPU lens data option in  
the shooting menu or by pressing the FUNC. button and rotating the main  
command dial. The following settings are available:  
• 6–45mm: 6, 8, 13, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 35, 43, and 45mm  
• 50–180mm: 50, 55, 58, 70, 80, 85, 86, 100, 105, 135, and 180mm  
• 200–4000mm: 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400,  
1600, 2000, 2400, 2800, 3200, and 4000mm  
The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu  
Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the shooting  
1
menu ( 158) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
Focal Length Not Listed  
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater than the actual  
focal length of the lens.  
121  
Highlight Focal length and press the multi  
2
3
4
selector to the right.  
Select the group to which the lens belongs  
from 6-45, 50-180, 200-4000 and press the  
multi selector to the right.  
Select the lens focal length (in mm) and press  
the multi selector to the right.  
The FUNC. Button  
Select FV Lock/Lens data for Custom Setting  
1
2
f4 (FUNC. Button;  
197).  
Press the FUNC. button and rotate the main  
command dial. Focal length is displayed in the  
top control panel:  
Default Maximum Aperture  
Selecting a focal length sets Maximum aperture to the last value selected at that  
focal length.  
122  
Specifying Maximum Aperture  
Lens maximum aperture can be specified using the Non-CPU lens data op-  
tion in the shooting menu or by pressing the FUNC. button and rotating the  
sub-command dial. The following f/-numbers are available:  
• 1.2, 1.4, 1.8, 2, 2.5, 2.8, 3.3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.6, 6.3, 7.1, 8, 9.5, 11, 13,15,  
16, 19, 22  
The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu  
Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the shooting  
1
2
3
menu ( 158) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
Highlight Maximum aperture and press the  
multi selector to the right.  
Select the f/-number corresponding to the  
maximum lens aperture and press the multi  
selector to the right.  
SB-800/SB-600  
If an SB-800 or SB-600 Speedlight is mounted on the camera, turn the Speedlight off  
before using the FUNC. button to specify lens data.  
Zoom Lenses  
Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. After changing  
the zoom position, select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture.  
123  
The FUNC. Button  
Select FV Lock/Lens data for Custom Setting  
1
2
f4 (FUNC. Button;  
197).  
Press the FUNC. button and rotate the sub-  
command dial. Maximum aperture is dis-  
played in the top control panel:  
124  
Using a GPS Unit  
Recording GPS Data  
Garmin and Magellan GPS units that conform to version 2.01 of the National  
Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 protocol can be connected to  
the cameras ten-pin remote terminal using an MC-35 GPS adapter cord  
(available separately;  
239), allowing information on the cameras current  
position to be recorded when photographs are taken. Operation has been  
confirmed with the following devices:  
• Garmin eTrex series  
• Magellan SporTrak series  
These devices connect to the MC-35 using the cable provided by the manu-  
facturer of the GPS device. See the MC-35 instruction manual for details.  
Before turning the camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode.  
When the camera establishes communication  
with a GPS device, a  
icon will be displayed in  
the top control panel. The exposure meters will  
not turn off while this icon is displayed. Photo  
information for pictures taken while the icon is  
displayed will include an additional page ( 130) recording the current lati-  
tude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If no data  
are received from the GPS unit for two seconds, the icon will clear from the  
display and the camera will stop recording GPS information.  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.  
GPS Data  
GPS data are only recorded when the  
played. Confirm that the icon is displayed in the  
top control panel before shooting. A flashing icon  
indicates that the GPS device is searching for a signal;  
icon is dis-  
pictures taken while the  
clude GPS data.  
icon is flashing will not in-  
125  
Two-Button Reset  
Restoring Default Settings  
The camera settings listed below can be restored  
to default values by holding the WB and ISO but-  
tons down together for more than two seconds  
(these buttons are marked by a green dot). The  
control panels turn off briefly while settings are  
reset. Custom Settings are not affected.  
Option  
Default  
Center*  
Option  
Default  
Focus area  
Aperture lock  
Shutter-speed lock  
Bracketing  
Off  
Exposure mode  
Flexible program  
Programmed auto  
Off  
Off  
Off‡  
Exposure  
compensation  
Flash sync mode  
Front-curtain sync  
0
Number of shots is reset to zero.  
Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV  
(exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white  
balance bracketing).  
AE hold  
Off†  
*If AF-area mode is set to group dynamic-  
AF, center group will be selected.  
Custom Setting c2 (AE-L/AF-L) is unaf-  
fected.  
The following shooting-menu options will also be reset. Only settings in the  
bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset  
(
159). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.  
Option  
Default  
JPEG Normal  
Large  
Option  
White bal.  
ISO  
Default  
Auto*  
200  
Image quality  
Image size  
*Fine tuning reset to 0.  
Reset Shooting Menu ( 161)  
Other shooting menu options for the current shooting menu bank can be reset by  
selecting Yes for the Reset shooting menu option in the shooting menu.  
R—Menu Reset ( 172)  
Custom Settings for the current custom settings bank can be restored to default values  
by selecting Yes for Custom Setting R (Menu Reset).  
126  
More About  
Playback  
Playback Options  
This section details the operations that can be  
performed during playback, including thumbnail  
playback, playback zoom, and photo information  
display.  
127  
Single-Image Playback  
To play photographs back, press the button. The most recent photograph  
will be displayed in the monitor.  
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the  
button or press  
the shutter-release button halfway. To view camera menus ( 39), press the  
button.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Image Review ( 156)  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu, photographs are auto-  
matically displayed in the monitor as they are being recorded to the memory card. In  
single-frame, self-timer, and mirror-up modes, photographs are displayed one at a time  
as they are taken. In continuous shooting mode, display begins when shooting ends,  
with the first photograph in the current series displayed. Playback will be interrupted  
when the shutter-release button is pressed, and resume when the button is released  
after shooting.  
Rotate Tall ( 157)  
This playback menu option controls whether portrait-orientation photographs taken  
with On selected for the Auto image rotation option in the setup menu are auto-  
matically rotated during playback.  
c5—Monitor Off ( 185)  
The monitor will turn off automatically to save power if no operations are performed  
for the time specified in Custom Setting c5 (Monitor off). Press the  
button again  
to return to playback mode.  
128  
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in single-image  
playback. There are up to eight pages of information for each photo. Press  
the multi-selector left or right to cycle through photo information as follows:  
(Page 5)(Page 4)(Page 3)Page 2Page 1 (Page 6) (Page 7)  
(Page 8) (Page 5).  
Page 1  
1 Voice memo icon...139  
1
2
3 Folder number/frame  
2 Protect status.........135  
number .................148  
100-1  
3
Page 2  
1
2
3
4
1 Voice memo icon...139  
2 Protect status.........135  
3 Focus brackets* ........72  
4 Frame number/total  
7 Image size ...............46  
8 Image quality...........43  
9 Date of recording.....18  
10 Time of recording ....18  
1/6  
number of frames..148 11 Folder number/frame  
5
6
7
8
5 File name...............163  
number .................148  
100ND2HS DSC_0001.JPG  
NORMAL  
100-1  
:
:
2005  
/
01  
/
10 15 45 36  
6 Folder name ..........148  
9
10  
11  
*If Focus area is selected for Display mode ( 156), active focus  
area is highlighted in red (in photos taken using single-servo AF with  
dynamic-area AF, group dynamic-AF, or closest-subject priority, area where  
focus first locked is highlighted).  
Page 3 (Shooting Data 1)*  
1
2
1 Voice memo icon...139  
2 Protect status.........135  
3 Camera name  
7 Exposure mode........83  
8 Exposure  
:
3
CAMERA  
NIKON D2Hs  
RIX  
METERING  
SHUTTER  
APERTURE  
4
compensation..........95  
:
:
5
7
9
1/250  
F5.6  
6
8
4 Metering method ....82  
9 Focal length...........234  
:
EXPOSURE MODE PROGRAM  
:
EXP.+/  
0.0  
5 Shutter speed ..........83 10 Folder number/frame  
6 Aperture..................83 number .................148  
FOCAL LENGTH 56mm  
100-1  
*Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode ( 156).  
10  
129  
Page 4 (Shooting Data 2)*  
1 Voice memo icon...139  
2 Protect status.........135  
3 Sensitivity  
1
2
6 Tone compensation..66  
7 Sharpening..............65  
8 Color mode .............68  
9 Image comment ....205  
:
3
5
7
9
ISO  
200  
0
WHITE BAL.  
WHITE BAL.  
TONE  
O
4
6
8
:
:
:
:
/
(ISO equivalency)....50  
AUTO  
SHARPNESS  
COLOR MODE  
COMMENT  
AUTO  
MODE1  
4 White balance .........52 10 Folder number/frame  
5 White balance  
number .................148  
100-1  
adjustment ..............54  
10  
*Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode ( 156).  
†Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO on.  
Page 5 (GPS Data)*  
1
2
1 Voice memo icon...139  
2 Protect status.........135  
3 Latitude.................125  
4 Longitude..............125  
5 Altitude .................125  
6 Coordinated Universal  
Time (UTC) ............125  
7 Folder number/frame  
number .................148  
:
3
4
5
LATITUDE  
N
36. 36  
:
:
:
:
LONGITUDE  
E
139 44. 22  
11m  
ALTITUDE  
TIME(UTC)  
2005 01 10  
06 45 36  
6
:
:
*Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken ( 125).  
100-1  
7
Page 6 (Histogram)*  
1
2
3
4
1 Voice memo icon................................................139  
2 Protect status......................................................135  
3 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the  
image. Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel bright-  
ness, vertical axis shows number of pixels of each  
brightness in image.  
100-1  
4 Folder number/frame number.............................148  
*Displayed only if Histogram is selected for Display mode ( 156).  
130  
Page 7 (Highlights)*  
1
2
3
1 Voice memo icon................................................139  
2 Protect status......................................................135  
3 Image highlights (areas of image that may be over-  
exposed) are marked by a flashing border†  
4 Current channel  
5 Folder number/frame number.............................148  
Highlight 100-1  
RGB RGB  
*Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode ( 156).  
†Highlights can be displayed separately for each color channel. Press multi  
selector left or right while pressing button to cycle  
4
5
through channels as follows: RGB (all channels)  
R (red)G (green)B (blue)RGB.  
Page 8 (RGB Histogram)*  
1
2
3
1 Voice memo icon...139  
2 Protect status.........135  
3 Image highlights (areas  
of image that may be  
6 Histogram (RGB chan-  
nel). In all histograms,  
horizontal axis gives  
pixel brightness, vertical  
axis number of pixels.  
7 Histogram (red channel)  
8 Histogram (green chan-  
nel)  
7
8
9
Highlight  
100-1  
4
5
6
overexposed) are marked  
RGB RGB  
by a flashing border†  
4 Folder number/frame  
number .................148  
5 Current channel  
9 Histogram (blue channel)  
*Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (  
156).  
†Highlights can be displayed separately for each color channel. Press multi  
selector left or right while pressing button to cycle  
through channels as follows: RGB (all channels)↔  
R (red)G (green)B (blue)highlight display  
offRGB.  
Histograms  
Camera histograms are for use only as a guide and may differ from those displayed in  
imaging applications.  
f3—Photo Info/Playback ( 196)  
The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed, so that the left and right but-  
tons display other images and the up and down buttons control photo information.  
131  
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact sheets” of four or  
nine images, press the  
button and rotate the  
main command dial. The following operations  
can be performed while thumbnails are dis-  
played:  
To  
Press and/or rotate  
Description  
Change  
number  
of images  
displayed  
Press  
button and rotate main command dial  
to change the number of images displayed as  
follows: single imagefour thumbnailsnine  
thumbnailssingle image.  
Toggle  
full frame  
playback  
Press center of multi selector to switch back  
and forth between full frame and thumbnail  
playback.  
Highlight  
images  
Press multi selector up, right, left, or down to  
highlight thumbnails.  
Page  
through  
images  
Press button and rotate sub-command dial to  
scroll through images a page at a time.  
Confirmation dialog will  
be displayed. Press  
again to delete photo. To  
exit without deleting pho-  
to, press multi selector left  
or right.  
Delete  
images  
Zoom in on  
highlighted  
photo  
Press  
for enlarged view of highlighted photo  
( )  
(
134).  
f1—Center Button>Playback Mode ( 194)  
Instead of toggling between full-frame and thumbnail playback, the center of the  
multi selector can be used to toggle playback zoom or display a histogram.  
132  
To  
Press and/or rotate  
Description  
If voice memo has not been recorded for high-  
lighted photo, voice memo will be recorded  
Record/  
play voice  
memo  
while  
button is pressed (  
138). If voice  
memo has been recorded for highlighted image,  
pressing button will start playback. Press again  
to pause playback ( 142).  
Images marked by  
using button or Delete option in playback  
menu (note that protected images will be delet-  
ed when memory card is formatted). To protect  
image, or to remove protection from protected  
icon can not be deleted  
Change  
protect  
status of  
highlighted  
photo  
image, press  
button ( 135).  
Display  
menus  
Press  
39).  
button to display camera menus (  
Return to  
shooting  
mode  
To end playback and return to shooting mode,  
press  
button or press shutter-release button  
Shutter-release/  
halfway.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Image Review ( 156)  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu, photographs are auto-  
matically displayed in the monitor as they are being recorded to the memory card. In  
single-frame and self-timer modes, photographs are displayed one at a time as they are  
taken. In continuous shooting mode, display begins when shooting ends. Thumbnail  
playback is only available in continuous shooting mode.  
c5—Monitor Off ( 185)  
The monitor will turn off automatically to save power if no operations are performed  
for the time specified in Custom Setting c5 (Monitor off). Press the  
button again  
to return to playback mode.  
133  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Press the  
button to zoom in on the image displayed in single-image play-  
back or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback. The fol-  
lowing operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:  
To  
Use  
( )  
Description  
Cancel/  
resume zoom  
Press  
to cancel zoom and return to single-image or  
thumbnail playback. Press again to zoom image in.  
Press button to display frame  
showing area currently zoomed in.  
While button is pressed, multi  
selector can be used to move frame  
and main command dial can be used  
to control size of frame—rotate  
Select area  
displayed  
dial counterclockwise to zoom out,  
clockwise to zoom in to maximum of approximately 15×  
(large images) or 12× (medium images). Release button  
to magnify selected area to fill monitor.  
View other  
images  
Rotate main command dial to view same area of other im-  
ages at current zoom ratio.  
Use multi selector to view area not  
visible in monitor. Hold multi se-  
lector down to scroll rapidly to other  
areas of frame.  
View other  
areas of im-  
age  
134  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the  
button can be used to  
protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be  
deleted using the button or the Delete option in the playback menu, and  
have DOS “read-only” status when viewed on a Windows computer. Note  
that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.  
To protect a photograph:  
Display the image in full-frame playback or highlight it in the thumbnail  
1
2
list.  
Press the  
button. The photograph will be marked with a  
icon.  
To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted, display  
the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the  
button.  
Voice Memos  
Changes to the protect status of images also apply to any voice memos that may  
have been recorded with the images. Voice memo overwrite status can not be set  
separately.  
Removing Protection from All Images  
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in  
the Playback folder menu, press the  
and  
buttons together for about two  
seconds.  
135  
Deleting Individual Photographs  
To delete a photograph displayed in single-image or zoom playback, or the  
photograph highlighted in thumbnail playback, press the  
deleted, photographs can not be recovered.  
button. Once  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.  
1
2
Press the button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
To delete the photograph, press the  
button again. To exit without  
3
deleting the photograph, press the multi selector left or right.  
Voice Memos  
If a voice memo has been recorded with the selected  
image, the confirmation dialog shown at right will be  
displayed when the  
button is pressed.  
Image/Sound: Select this option and press the  
button to delete both photo and voice memo.  
Sound only: Select this option and press the  
but-  
ton to delete only the voice memo.  
To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo, press multi selector left or right.  
Protected and Hidden Images  
Images marked with a  
icon are protected and can not be deleted. Hidden images  
are not displayed in single-image or thumbnail playback and can not be selected for  
deletion.  
Delete ( 146)  
To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu.  
After Delete ( 157)  
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or  
the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted.  
136  
Voice Memos  
Recording and Playback  
The D2Hs is equipped with a built-in microphone,  
allowing voice memos to be added to photo-  
graphs. Voice memos can be played back over  
the cameras built-in speaker.  
137  
Recording Voice Memos  
Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to photographs using  
the built-in microphone. In shooting mode, a voice memo can be added  
to the most recent photograph. In playback mode, voice memos can be  
added to photographs displayed in single-image playback or selected in the  
thumbnail list.  
Ready the camera for recording.  
1
Shooting Mode  
At default settings, voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.  
To enable automatic or manual voice memo recording, select the appro-  
priate option for Voice memo in the camera setup menu ( 201). Voice  
memos can only be added to the last photograph taken.  
Playback Mode  
Display the photograph to which the memo is to be added (single-image  
playback) or highlight the photograph in the thumbnail list (thumbnail  
playback). Only one voice memo can be recorded per image; additional  
voice memos can not be recorded for images already marked with a  
icon.  
Press and hold the button. A voice memo  
2
will be recorded while the button is held down  
(note that no voice memo will be recorded if  
the button is not held down for at least one  
second).  
Automatic Recording (Shooting Mode)  
If On (auto and manual) is selected for Voice memo, a voice memo  
will be recorded for the last photograph taken when the shutter-release  
button is released after shooting. Recording will end when the button  
is pressed or after the specified recording time has ended.  
Dust Off Ref Photos  
Voice memos can not be recorded for Image Dust Off reference data ( 209).  
138  
Interrupting Recording  
Recording will end automatically if:  
• The  
• The  
button is pressed to display the menus  
button is pressed  
• The shutter-release button is pressed halfway  
• The camera is turned off  
During interval timer photography, recording will end automatically about two seconds  
before the next photograph is taken.  
During Recording  
During recording, the  
icons in the rear  
Rear control panel Viewfinder  
Monitor  
control panel and viewfinder sidebar will  
blink. A countdown timer in the rear con-  
trol panel shows the length of the voice  
memo that can be recorded (in seconds).  
In playback mode, a icon is displayed in  
the monitor during recording.  
After Recording  
If a voice memo has been recorded for  
the most recent photograph, a icon will  
be displayed in the rear control panel and  
viewfinder sidebar.  
Rear control panel Viewfinder  
Monitor  
If a voice memo exists for the photograph  
currently selected in playback mode, a  
icon will be displayed in the monitor.  
Voice Memo File Names  
Voice memos are stored as WAV files with names of the form “xxxxnnnn.WAV,” where  
xxxxnnnn“ is a file name copied from the image with which the voice memo is associ-  
ated. For example, the voice memo for the image “DSC_0002.JPG” would have the  
file name “DSC_0002.WAV. Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer.  
139  
Voice Memo Recording Options  
Three setup menu options control voice memo recording: Voice memo,  
Voice memo overwrite, and Voice memo button.  
Voice Memo  
To choose a voice memo option for shooting  
mode, highlight Voice memo in the setup menu  
(
201) and press the multi selector to the right.  
The following options are available:  
Option  
Description  
Off  
(default)  
Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.  
Selecting this option displays menu shown at  
right; select maximum recording time from 5,  
10, 20, 30, 45, or 60s. Unless On is selected  
for Image review in playback menu, recording  
will begin when shutter-release button is released  
after shooting. Recording ends when button  
is pressed or after specified recording time has  
ended.  
On  
(auto and  
manual)  
Manual Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph by pressing and  
only holding button ( 138).  
Voice Memo  
The option selected for Voice memo is indicated by an icon in the rear control panel.  
On (auto and manual)  
Manual only  
140  
Voice Memo Overwrite  
This option controls whether the voice memo for  
the most recent photograph can be overwritten  
in shooting mode. Highlight Voice memo over-  
write in the setup menu ( 201) and press the  
multi selector to the right. The following options  
are available:  
Option  
Description  
Voice memo can be recorded in shooting mode even if one already exists  
for most recent image. Existing memo will be deleted and replaced by new  
memo. Voice memos can not be overwritten in playback mode.  
Disable  
(default)  
Voice memo can not be recorded in shooting mode if one already exists for  
most recent image.  
Enable  
Voice Memo Button  
This option controls manual recording. Highlight  
Voice memo button in the setup menu ( 201)  
and press the multi selector to the right. The fol-  
lowing options are available:  
Option  
Press and hold Voice memo is recorded while button is held down. Recording  
(default) will end automatically after 60s.  
Press to start/ Recording begins when button is pressed and ends when but-  
stop ton is pressed again. Recording will end automatically after 60s.  
Description  
141  
Playing Voice Memos  
Voice memos can be played back over the cam-  
eras built-in speaker when the associated image  
is viewed in single-frame playback or highlighted  
in the thumbnail list. The presence of a voice  
memo is indicated by an icon.  
To  
Press  
Description  
Start/end  
playback  
Press to start playback. Playback will end when button is  
pressed again or entire memo has been played back.  
Confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
Press multi selector up or down to high-  
light option, press  
Image/Sound: Delete both photo and  
voice memo.  
Sound only: Delete voice memo only.  
To exit without deleting image or voice memo, press multi  
selector left or right.  
to select.  
Delete  
voice  
memo  
Interrupting Playback  
Playback will end automatically if:  
• The  
button is pressed to display the menus  
• The monitor is turned off by pressing the button or by pressing the shutter-release  
button halfway  
• The camera is turned off  
• Another image is displayed (single-image playback) or another thumbnail is high-  
lighted (thumbnail playback)  
142  
Voice Memo Playback Options  
The Audio output option in the setup menu  
controls whether voice memos are played back  
over the cameras built-in speaker or by a device  
to which the camera is connected via the EG-D2  
audio/video cable. When sound is played back  
over the built-in speaker, the Audio output op-  
tion also controls playback volume.  
Highlight Audio output in the setup menu ( 201) and press the multi  
selector to the right. The following options are available:  
Option  
Description  
Voice memos are played back over built-in  
speaker. Selecting this option displays menu  
shown at right. Press multi selector up or down  
to change volume. Beep will sound when op-  
tion is selected. Press multi selector to right to  
make selection and return to setup menu.  
Via speaker  
(default)  
Via VIDEO  
OUT  
Audio signal output to A/V-OUT terminal.  
Video memos are not played back.  
for which voice memo exists is viewed in monitor.  
icon is displayed when photo  
Off  
143  
144  
Menu Guide  
Index to Menu Options  
Changes to a variety of camera settings are made  
with the help of menus that appear in the camera  
monitor. This chapter covers:  
The Playback Menu  
The playback menu contains options for manag-  
ing the images stored on memory cards, and for  
playing pictures back in automated slide shows.  
The Shooting Menu  
The shooting menu contains advanced shoot-  
ing options, such as image sharpening and tone  
compensation.  
Custom Settings  
The CSM (Custom Settings) menu controls fine  
details of camera operation.  
The Setup Menu  
This menu is used for basic camera setup op-  
erations, including formatting memory cards and  
setting the time and date.  
145  
The Playback Menu  
Managing Images  
The playback menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Delete  
146–147  
148  
Playback folder  
Slide show  
Hide image  
Print set  
149–150  
151–152  
153–155  
156  
Display mode  
Image review  
After delete  
Rotate tall  
156  
157  
157  
The playback menu is only displayed if there is a memory card in the camera.  
Delete  
To display the delete menu, highlight Delete and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Selected Delete selected photographs.  
All Delete all photographs.  
Description  
High-Capacity Memory Cards  
If the memory card contains a large number of files or folders and the number of pic-  
tures to be deleted is very large, deletion can sometimes take more than half an hour.  
Protected and Hidden Images  
Images marked with a  
icon are protected and can not be deleted. Hidden images  
(
151) are not displayed in the thumbnail list and can not be selected for deletion.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
146  
Deleting Selected Photographs: Selected  
Choosing Selected displays the photographs in the folder or folders selected  
in the Playback folder menu ( 148) as small thumbnail images.  
1
2
Highlight image. (To view highlight-  
ed image full screen, press . Press  
again to return to thumbnail list.)  
Select highlighted image. Selected  
image marked by icon.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture,  
highlight and press center of multi selector. To exit without deleting  
3
4
pictures, press  
button.  
Confirmation dialog displayed. Press  
multi selector up or down to highlight  
option, press  
to select.  
Yes: delete selected pictures and any  
associated voice memos  
No: exit without deleting images  
Deleting All Photographs: All  
Choosing All displays the confirmation dialog  
shown at right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press the  
button to make a selection.  
Yes: delete all images in the folder or folders  
selected in the Playback folder menu ( 148),  
together with any associated voice memos. Pic-  
tures that are protected or hidden will not be  
deleted.  
No: exit without deleting images.  
147  
Playback Folder  
To display the playback folder menu, highlight  
Playback folder in the playback menu ( 146)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
ND2HS Images in all folders created by the D2Hs will be visible during playback.  
Images in all folders created by cameras that conform to the Design  
Rule for Camera File System (DCF)—all Nikon digital cameras and most  
other makes of digital camera—will be visible during playback.  
All  
Current Only images in the current folder will be visible during playback.  
Selecting a Folder for Storage  
The Active folder option in the shooting menu is used to create new folders and to  
select the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored ( 162).  
“Current”  
If multiple folders are created using the Active folder>New option in the shooting  
menu ( 162), only photographs in the folder selected in the Active folder menu will  
be played back when Current is selected for Playback folder. To view photographs  
in other folders, select ND2HS or All.  
148  
Slide Show  
To play images back one after the other in an  
automated “slide show,” highlight Slide show in  
the playback menu ( 146) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Start  
Start slide show.  
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.  
Audio playback Display menu of voice memo playback options.  
Starting the Slide Show: Start  
To start the slide show, highlight Start and press the multi selector to the  
right. All photographs in the folder or folders selected in the Playback  
folder menu ( 148) will be played back in the order recorded, with a pause  
between each image. Hidden photographs ( 151) will not be played back.  
The following operations can be performed during a slide show:  
To  
Press  
Description  
Go forward or  
back one frame  
Press multi selector up to return to previous frame, down  
to skip to next frame.  
View photo  
info  
Press multi selector left or right to change photo info  
displayed during slide show.  
Pause  
Press  
to pause slide show ( 150).  
Exit to playback  
menu  
Press  
Press  
to end slide show and display playback menu.  
to end slide show and return to playback with  
Exit to playback  
mode  
current image displayed in monitor.  
Press shutter-release button halfway to end slide show,  
turn monitor off, and return to shooting mode (voice  
memo playback will not be interrupted).  
Exit to shooting Shutter  
mode release  
149  
The dialog shown at right is displayed when the  
show ends or when the button is pressed to  
pause playback. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Restart: Resume slide show.  
Frame interval: Change the length of time each picture is displayed.  
Audio playback: Display a menu of voice memo playback options.  
To exit the slide show and return to the playback menu, press the multi se-  
lector to the left or press the  
button.  
Changing the Display Interval: Frame Interval  
To change the time each image is displayed, high-  
light Frame interval in the Slide show or pause  
menu and press the multi selector right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight the appro-  
priate option and then press the multi selector to  
the right to return to the previous menu.  
Voice Memo Playback Options: Audio Playback  
Selecting Audio playback in the Slide show or  
pause menu displays the menu shown at right.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
an option, then press to the right to make a selec-  
tion.  
Option  
Description  
Off Voice memos are not played back during slide shows.  
Voice memos are played back during slide shows.  
Menu shown at right will be displayed; press multi  
selector up or down to highlight option, press to  
right select.  
On  
Frame interval: Playback ends when next frame is  
displayed, even if entire memo has not been played.  
Length of voice memo: Next frame is not displayed until entire memo  
has been played, even if frame interval is shorter than voice memo.  
150  
Hide Image  
The Hide image option is used to hide or reveal selected photographs. Hid-  
den images are visible only in the Hide image menu, and can only be deleted  
by formatting the memory card.  
Highlight Hide image in the playback menu (  
146) and press the multi selector to the right.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
an option, then press right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Select/set Hide or reveal selected photographs.  
Deselect all? Reveal all photographs.  
Hiding Selected Photographs: Select/Set  
Choosing Select/set displays the photographs in the folder or folders se-  
lected in the Playback folder menu ( 148) as small thumbnail images.  
1
2
4
Highlight image. (To view highlight-  
ed image full screen, press . Press  
again to return to thumbnail list.)  
Select highlighted image. Selected  
image marked by  
icon.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select  
additional pictures. To deselect  
picture, highlight and press  
center of multi selector. To exit  
without changing hidden status  
3
of pictures, press  
button.  
Complete operation and return to  
playback menu.  
151  
Revealing All Photographs: Deselect All  
Choosing Deselect all? displays the confirmation  
dialog shown at right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press the  
button to make a selection.  
Yes: reveal all images in the folder or folders  
selected in the Playback folder menu ( 148).  
The monitor will briefly show the message  
“Hide image done,” and then the playback  
menu will be displayed.  
No: exit to the playback menu without changing the hidden status of im-  
ages.  
File Attributes for Hidden Images  
Hidden images have “hidden” and “read-only” status when viewed on a Windows  
computer. In the case of “NEF+JPEG” images, this marking applies to both the NEF  
(RAW) and JPEG image.  
Protected and Hidden Images  
Removing protection from an image that is both hidden and protected will simultane-  
ously reveal the image.  
152  
Print Set  
Print set is used to create a digital “print order” that lists the photographs  
to be printed, the number of copies, and the information to be included on  
each print. This information is stored on the memory card in Digital Print  
Order Format (DPOF). The card can then be removed from the camera and  
used to print the selected images printed on any DPOF-compatible device.  
Highlight Print set in the playback menu ( 146)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Select/set Select photographs for printing.  
Deselect all? Remove all images from print order.  
Print Set  
Print set will not be available if there is not enough space on the memory card to  
record the print order. Delete unwanted pictures and try again.  
NEF Images  
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (Raw) ( 43) can not be selected for  
printing using this option.  
Taking Pictures for Direct Printing  
When taking images to be printed without modification, set the Color mode option  
in the shooting menu to I (sRGB) or III (sRGB) ( 67).  
DPOF/PictBridge  
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows pictures to  
be printed from print orders stored on the memory card. Before printing, check that  
the printer or print service supports DPOF. Pictures selected using Print set can also be  
printed on PictBridge printers via direct USB connection ( 226). When a PictBridge  
printer is connected to the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable, a menu will  
be displayed in the camera monitor; select DPOF print to print the current print order.  
Note that the date and shooting information will not be printed.  
153  
Modifying the Print Order: Select/Set  
Choosing Select/set displays the photographs in the folder or folders se-  
lected in the Playback folder menu ( 148) as small thumbnail images.  
Highlight image. (To view highlighted  
image full screen, press . Press again  
to return to thumbnail list.)  
1
Press button and press multi selector  
up or down to specify number of prints  
2
(up to 99), or press center of multi se-  
lector to select image and set number  
of prints to 1. Selected images are  
marked by  
icon.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture,  
highlight and press center of multi selector. To exit without changing  
3
4
print order, press  
button.  
Complete print order and display menu of print options. Press multi selector  
up or down to highlight option.  
• To print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order, highlight  
Data imprint and press multi selector to right. will appear next to item.  
• To print date of recording on all pictures in print order, highlight Imprint  
date and press multi selector to right. will appear next to item.  
• To deselect checked item, highlight and press multi selector to right.  
To complete print order and return to playback menu, highlight Done and  
press multi selector to right. To exit without altering print order, press  
button.  
154  
Removing All Images from the Print Order: Deselect All  
Choosing Deselect all? displays the confirmation  
dialog shown at right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press the  
button to make a selection.  
Yes: remove all images from the print order.  
The monitor will briefly show the message  
“Print set done,” and then the playback menu  
will be displayed.  
No: exit to the playback menu without changing the print order.  
After Creating a Print Order  
After creating a print order, do not change the hidden status of images in the print  
order or use a computer or other device to delete images. Either action could cause  
problems during printing.  
Exif version 2.21  
The D2Hs supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras) ver-  
sion 2.21, a standard that allows information stored with photographs to be used for  
optimal color reproduction when images are output on Exif-compliant printers.  
155  
Display Mode  
To choose the information listed in the photo-  
information display ( 129), highlight Display  
mode in the playback menu ( 146) and press  
the multi selector to the right. Press the multi se-  
lector up or down to highlight options, then press  
to the right to make a selection. A appears  
next to selected items; to deselect, highlight and press the multi selector to  
the right. To return to the playback menu, highlight Done and press the  
multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Data*  
Description  
Shooting data appears in photo information display.  
Histogram appears in photo information display.  
Highlight page appears in photo information display.  
Histogram  
Highlights*  
RGB histogram* Histogram appears in photo information display.  
Active focus area (if single-servo AF is used with dynamic-area AF,  
group dynamic-AF, or closest-subject priority, area where focus  
first locked) is shown in red in photo information display.  
Focus area  
*Default selection.  
Image Review  
Image review controls whether or not photo-  
graphs are displayed in the monitor immediately  
after shooting. Highlight Image review in the  
playback menu ( 146) and press the multi se-  
lector to the right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Off  
Description  
Photographs are not automatically displayed after shooting.  
Photographs are automatically displayed after shooting.  
On  
156  
After Delete  
To choose whether the following or previous pic-  
ture is displayed after an image is deleted, high-  
light After delete in the playback menu ( 146)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Show After image is deleted, following image is displayed or highlighted in  
next thumbnail list. If deleted image was last frame in memory, previous  
Description  
(default) frame will be displayed or highlighted.  
After image is deleted, previous image is displayed or highlighted in  
thumbnail list. If deleted image was first frame in memory, following  
frame will be displayed or highlighted.  
Show  
previous  
If user was scrolling through images in order recorded before deletion,  
following image will be displayed or highlighted (if deleted image was  
last frame in memory, previous frame will be displayed or highlighted).  
If user was scrolling through images in reverse order, previous image will  
be displayed or highlighted (if deleted image was first frame in memory,  
following frame will be displayed or highlighted).  
Continue  
as before  
Rotate Tall  
To choose whether photographs taken in “tall”  
(portrait) orientation are automatically rotated for  
display in the monitor, highlight Rotate tall in  
the playback menu ( 146) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
(default)  
Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are not displayed in tall orientation.  
Tall” (portrait) orientation photos taken with On selected for Auto image  
rotation ( 206) are displayed in tall orientation during playback (tall ori-  
entation images are displayed at 2/3 size of other images to fit monitor).  
On  
157  
The Shooting Menu  
Shooting Options  
The shooting menu contains three pages of options:  
Option  
Shooting menu bank  
159–160  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
161  
162  
File Naming  
163  
Image quality*  
Image size*  
43–44  
46–47  
45  
JPEG compression  
Raw compression  
White Balance*  
Long exp. NR  
46  
52–64  
165  
High ISO NR  
165  
ISO*  
50–51  
65  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
66  
67–68  
69  
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
115–119  
121–124  
*Reset to defaults when a two-button reset is per-  
formed ( 126).  
Press the multi selector up or down to scroll between pages.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
158  
Shooting Menu Bank  
All shooting menu options except interval timer settings are stored in one of  
four banks. Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others.  
To store a particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of  
the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new settings will be  
stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off, and will be restored  
the next time the bank is selected. Different combinations of settings can  
be stored in the other banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one  
combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank  
menu.  
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C, and D. A  
descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option.  
To display the bank menu, highlight Shooting  
menu bank in the shooting menu ( 158) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
A*  
(default)  
Select bank A.  
B*  
C*  
D*  
Select bank B.  
Select bank C.  
Select bank D.  
Rename Rename selected bank.  
*Descriptive caption will also be displayed if bank has been renamed.  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)  
If a bank in which ISO has been set to HI-1 or HI-2 is chosen after On is selected for  
Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto; 180), sensitivity (ISO equivalency) will NOT be adjusted  
automatically.  
Shooting Menu Bank  
The rear control panel shows the bank currently selected  
in the shooting menu bank menu.  
159  
Renaming Shooting Menu Banks  
Highlight Rename and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
2
A list of shooting menu banks will be dis-  
played. Highlight the desired bank and press  
the multi selector to the right.  
The following dialog will be displayed. Enter a name as described be-  
low.  
3
Keyboard area  
Name area  
Use multi selector to  
Name appears here. To  
highlight letters, press  
move cursor, press  
button and use multi  
center of multi selector  
to select.  
selector.  
To move the cursor in the name area, press the  
button and use the  
multi selector. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use  
the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area  
and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the  
current cursor position, press the  
menu without changing the bank name, press the  
button. To return to the shooting  
button.  
Bank names can be up to twenty characters long. Any characters after  
the twentieth will be deleted.  
After editing the name, press  
the bank menu.  
to return to  
4
160  
Reset Shooting Menu  
To restore default settings for the current shooting  
menu bank ( 159), highlight Reset shooting  
menu in the shooting menu ( 158) and press  
the multi selector to the right. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
No Exit menu, leaving settings unchanged.  
Yes Restore settings to default values.  
The following settings are affected:  
Option  
File naming  
Image quality*  
Image size*  
Default  
DSC  
Option  
Color mode  
Default  
I (sRGB)  
0
JPEG Normal  
Large  
Hue  
Interval timer shooting‡  
JPEG compression  
Fixed size  
Start time  
Interval  
Now  
00:01´:00˝  
Raw compression Comp. NEF (Raw)  
White balance*  
Long exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO*  
Auto†  
No. of intervals  
No. of shots  
Start  
1
1
Off  
Off  
On (Normal)  
200  
Non-CPU lens data  
Focal length  
N/A  
N/A  
Image sharpening  
Auto  
Maximum  
aperture  
Tone  
compensation  
Auto  
*Defaults can also be restored by perform-  
ing two-button reset ( 126).  
Fine tuning reset to 0.  
Applies to all banks. Shooting ends  
when reset is performed.  
161  
Active Folder  
To select the folder in which subsequent im-  
ages will be stored, highlight Active folder in  
the shooting menu ( 158) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Dialog shown at right will be displayed; press  
multi selector up or down to choose number for  
new folder. Press multi selector to right to create  
new folder and return to shooting menu. Subse-  
quent photographs will be stored in new folder.  
New  
List of existing folders will be displayed; press  
multi selector up or down to highlight folder,  
press to right to select and return to shooting  
menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored  
in selected folder.  
Select  
folder  
Number of Folders  
Additional time will be required for recording and playback if the memory card con-  
tains a very large number of folders.  
Automatic Folder Creation  
If the current folder contains 999 files, or if sequential file numbering ( 188) is on and  
the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999, the camera will automatically  
create a new folder for the next picture by adding one to the current folder number. If  
the memory card already contains a folder numbered 999, the shutter release will be  
disabled. If sequential file numbering is on, the shutter release will also be disabled if  
the current folder is numbered 999 and contains a picture numbered 9999. To con-  
tinue shooting, create a folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder  
with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images.  
Creating a Folder at Startup  
If the  
button is pressed when the camera is turned on, a new folder will be created  
by adding one to the current folder number if no empty folders already exist.  
162  
File Naming  
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or “_DSC”  
followed by a four-digit file number and a three-letter extension (e.g., “DSC_  
0001.JPG”). The File Naming option is used to change the “DSC” portion  
of the file name.  
Highlight File Naming in the shooting menu (  
158) and press the multi selector to the right. The  
menu shown at right will be displayed; press the  
multi selector to the right to display the following  
dialog.  
Keyboard area  
Prefix area  
Use multi selector to high-  
File name prefix appears  
light letters, press center  
here. To move cursor left  
of multi selector to select.  
or right, press  
button  
and use multi selector.  
To move the cursor left or right in the prefix area, press the button and use  
the multi selector. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use  
the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and  
press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the current  
cursor position, press the button. To return to the shooting menu without  
changing the file naming rule, press the  
button.  
After editing the file name prefix, press  
to return to the shooting menu.  
New photographs will be saved using the new file naming rule.  
Image Quality  
Eight options are available for image quality. See  
Taking Photographs: Image Quality and Size”  
(
43).  
163  
Image Size  
Image size can be selected from Large and Me-  
dium. See Taking Photographs: Image Quality  
and Size” ( 46).  
JPEG Compression  
Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a  
fixed size or to vary file size for improved image  
quality. See Taking Photographs: Image Quality  
and Size” ( 45).  
Raw Compression  
Choose whether to compress NEF (RAW) images  
created at image-quality settings of RAW+JPEG  
(Fine), RAW+JPEG (Normal), RAW+JPEG (Ba-  
sic), and NEF (Raw). See Taking Photographs:  
Image Quality and Size” ( 46).  
White Balance  
Nine options are available for white balance. See  
Taking Photographs: White Balance” ( 52).  
164  
Long Exp. NR  
Photographs taken at shutter speeds of 1s or  
slower can be processed to reduce “noise” in the  
form of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels.  
Highlight Long exp. NR in the shooting menu  
(
158) and press the multi selector to the right.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an  
option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
(default)  
Noise reduction off; camera functions normally.  
Noise reduction takes effect at shutter speeds of  
about 1s or slower. Time needed to process images  
more than doubles and number of images that can be  
stored in memory buffer is halved. During processing,  
blinks in shutter-speed/aperture displays.  
On  
Next photo can be taken when  
is no longer displayed. Note that  
if photographs are played back during processing, the image displayed in  
the monitor may not show the effects of noise reduction.  
High ISO NR  
Photographs taken at high sensitivities can be  
processed to reduce “noise.” Highlight High  
ISO NR in the shooting menu ( 158) and press  
the multi selector to the right. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Noise reduction takes effect at sensitivities of ISO 800–1600 or if sensi-  
tivity is raised to 800 or higher when On is selected for Custom Setting  
b1 (ISO auto). Increased noise reduction is performed at sensitivities  
of HI-1 and HI-2 or when On (High) is selected.  
On (Normal)  
(default)  
On (High)  
Off  
Noise reduction turns off except at sensitivities of HI-1 and HI-2.  
165  
ISO  
Sensitivity (ISO equivalency) can be increased from  
the default value (200). Settings of HI-1 and HI-2  
are only available when Custom Setting b1 (ISO  
auto) is off. See “Taking Photographs: Sensitivity  
(ISO Equivalency)” ( 50).  
Image Sharpening  
Seven options are available for image sharpening.  
See “Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment” (  
65).  
Tone Compensation  
Five options are available for controlling image  
contrast. See Taking Photographs: Image Ad-  
justment” ( 66).  
Color Mode  
Choose from three color modes. See “Taking  
Photographs: Image Adjustment” ( 67).  
166  
Hue Adjustment  
Hue can be set to values between approximately  
9° and +9° in seven increments of roughly 3°.  
See “Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment”  
(
69).  
Interval Timer Shooting  
Take photographs automatically at pre-selected  
intervals. See Taking Photographs: Interval Timer  
Photography” ( 115).  
Non-CPU Lens Data  
Specifying the focal length and maximum aper-  
ture allows such features as color matrix metering,  
aperture value display, and balanced fill flash to be  
used with non-CPU lenses. See “Taking Photo-  
graphs: Non-CPU Lenses” ( 121).  
167  
Custom Settings  
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings  
Custom settings are used to fine-tune a variety of camera settings to suit the  
users preferences, creating combinations of settings that differ from the fac-  
tory defaults in effect at the time your camera was purchased. In addition to  
Custom Settings C (Bank select) and R (Menu reset), settings in the CSM  
(Custom Settings) menu are divided into the following six groups:  
Group  
a Autofocus  
Custom Settings  
a1–a8  
b Metering/Exposure  
c Timers/AE&AF Lock  
d Shooting/Display  
e Bracketing/Flash  
f Controls  
b1–b7  
c1–c5  
d1–d6  
e1–e8  
f1–f7  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
the desired group and then press the multi se-  
lector to the right. The full list of Custom Settings  
a1–f7 will be displayed, starting with the settings  
in the selected group. To select a setting in a dif-  
ferent group, press the multi selector up or down  
scroll until the desired setting is displayed, or press the multi selector to the  
left to return the top menu and select a different group. Custom Setting a1  
(AF-C mode priority) and f7 (No CF card?) are linked: pressing the multi se-  
lector up when Custom Setting a1 is highlighted displays Custom Setting f7,  
while pressing the multi selector down while Custom Setting f7 is highlighted  
displays Custom Setting a1.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
168  
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Options  
C
R
a
Bank select  
Custom setting bank  
Reset CSM menu  
171  
Menu reset  
172–173  
Autofocus  
a1 AF-C mode priority  
a2 AF-S mode priority  
a3 Group dynamic AF  
a4 Lock-On  
AF-C priority selection  
AF-S priority selection  
174  
174  
Pattern selection in Group Dynamic AF  
Focus Tracking with Lock-On  
AF activation  
175–176  
177  
a5 AF activation  
a6 Focus area Illum  
a7 Focus area  
177  
Focus area Illumination  
Focus area select  
178  
179  
a8 Vertical AF-ON  
Metering/Exposure  
b1 ISO auto  
Vertical AF-ON button function  
179  
b
ISO auto control  
180  
181  
181  
181  
182  
183  
183  
b2 ISO step value  
b3 EV step  
ISO step value  
EV steps for exposure control  
EV steps for exposure compensation  
Easy exposure compensation  
Center weight area  
b4 Exposure comp. EV  
b5 Exposure comp.  
b6 Center weight  
b7 Fine tune exposure  
Timers/AE&AF Lock  
c1 AE Lock  
Fine tune optimal exposure  
c
AE Lock buttons  
184  
184  
185  
185  
185  
c2 AE-L/AF-L  
Assignment of AE-L/AF-L button  
Auto meter-off delay  
Self-timer delay  
c3 Auto meter-off  
c4 Self-timer  
c5 Monitor off  
Monitor off delay  
169  
Options  
d
Shooting/Display  
d1 Shooting speed  
d2 Maximum shots  
d3 Exp. delay mode  
d4 File No. Seq.  
CL-Mode shooting speed  
Max No. of shots taken in continuous shooting  
Exposure delay mode  
186  
186  
187  
File number sequence  
188  
d5 Cntrl panel/finder  
d6 Illumination  
Control panel/viewfinder display  
LCD Illumination  
188–189  
189  
e
Bracketing/Flash  
e1 Flash sync speed  
e2 Flash shutter speed  
e3 AA flash mode  
e4 Modeling flash  
e5 Auto BKT set  
Flash sync speed setting  
Slowest speed when using flash  
AA flash mode  
190  
190  
191  
191  
192  
193  
193  
194  
Preview button activates modeling flash  
Auto bracketing set  
e6 Manual mode bkting Auto bracketing in M exposure mode  
e7 Auto BKT Order  
e8 Auto BKT selection  
Controls  
Auto bracketing order  
Auto Bracketing Selection method  
f
f1 Center button  
f2 Multi selector  
f3 PhotoInfo/Playback  
f4 FUNC. button  
f5 Command dials  
f6 Buttons and dials  
f7 No CF card?  
Multi selector center button  
When multi selector is pressed:  
Role of multi selector in Full-Frame Playback  
Assign FUNC. Button  
194–195  
196  
196  
197  
Customize command dials  
198–199  
200  
Setting method for buttons and dials  
Disable shutter if no CF card  
200  
170  
Custom Setting C: Custom Setting Bank  
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to settings in  
one bank have no effect on the others. To store a particular combination of  
frequently-used settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera to  
these settings. The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the  
camera is turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.  
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks, allowing  
the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the  
appropriate bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C, and D. A  
descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described in  
“The Shooting Menu: Shooting Menu Bank” ( 159).  
To display the bank menu, highlight Bank select  
in the top level of the CSM menu ( 168) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
A*  
(default)  
Select bank A.  
B*  
C*  
D*  
Select bank B.  
Select bank C.  
Select bank D.  
Rename Rename selected bank.  
*Descriptive caption will also be displayed if bank has been renamed.  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)  
If a bank in which On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto;  
after ISO has been set to HI-1 or HI-2, sensitivity (ISO equivalency) will NOT be adjusted  
automatically.  
180) is chosen  
171  
Custom Setting R: Reset CSM Menu  
To restore default settings for the current Custom  
Settings bank ( 171), highlight Menu reset in  
the top level of the CSM menu ( 168) and press  
the multi selector to the right. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
No Exit menu, leaving settings unchanged.  
Yes Restore settings to default values.  
Two-Button Reset  
Custom Settings are not reset when a two-button reset is performed ( 126).  
Custom Settings Bank  
If settings in the current bank have been modified from  
default values, the rear control panel display will show  
CUSTOM and the letter of the bank. An asterisk will be  
displayed next to the altered settings in the second level  
of the Custom Settings menu.  
172  
Default settings are listed below.  
Option  
Default  
FPS rate  
Focus  
Option  
Default  
Off  
a1 AF-C mode priority  
a2 AF-S mode priority  
d3 Exp. delay mode  
d4 File No. Seq.  
Off  
d5 Cntrl panel/finder  
Pattern 1/  
Center area  
a3 Group dynamic AF  
Rear control panel  
ISO  
Viewfinder display  
Frame count  
a4 Lock-On  
On  
d6 Illumination  
Lamp on switch  
1/250  
a5 AF activation  
Shutter/AF-ON  
e1 Flash sync speed  
e2 Flash shutter speed  
e3 AA flash mode  
e4 Modeling flash  
e5 Auto BKT set  
a6 Focus area illum  
Manual focus mode  
Continuous mode  
When selected  
On  
On  
0.2s  
1/60  
On  
On  
a7 Focus area  
No wrap  
AE & flash  
Flash/speed  
MTR>Under>Over  
a8 Vertical AF-ON  
b1 ISO auto  
AF-ON+Focus area  
e6 Manual mode bkting  
e7 Auto BKT order  
Off  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
Off  
b2 ISO step value  
b3 EV step  
e8 Auto BKT selection Manual value select  
f1 Center button  
b4 Exposure comp. EV  
b5 Exposure comp.  
b6 Center weight  
b7 Fine tune exposure  
c1 AE Lock  
Shooting mode  
Playback mode  
Center AF area  
Thumbnail on/off  
φ 8mm  
0*  
f2 Multi selector  
f3 PhotoInfo/Playback  
f4 FUNC. button  
Do nothing  
Info  
/PB▲▼  
FV Lock  
AE-L/AF-L button  
AE/AF Lock  
6s  
c2 AE-L/AF-L  
f5 Command dials  
Rotate direction  
Change Main/Sub  
Aperture setting  
Normal  
Off  
Sub-command dial  
Off  
c3 Auto meter-off  
c4 Self-timer  
10s  
c5 Monitor off  
20s  
Menus and Playback  
d1 Shooting speed  
d2 Maximum shots  
3fps  
f6 Buttons and dials  
f7 No CF card?  
Default  
On  
50  
*Applies to all metering methods.  
173  
Custom Setting a1: AF-C Priority Selection  
This option controls whether photographs can  
be taken whenever the shutter-release button is  
pressed (release priority) or only when the camera  
is in focus (focus priority) in continuous-servo AF.  
Highlight a1 AF-C mode priority in the second  
level of the CSM menu ( 169) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
FPS rate  
(default)  
Photos can be taken whenever shutter-release button is pressed.  
Photos can be taken even when camera is not in focus. In continuous  
mode, frame rate slows for improved focus if subject is dark or low con-  
trast.  
FPS rate  
+ AF  
Focus  
Photos can only be taken when in-focus indicator () is displayed.  
Custom Setting a2: AF-S Priority Selection  
This option controls whether photographs can  
be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus  
priority) or whenever the shutter-release button is  
pressed (release priority) in single-servo AF. High-  
light a2 AF-S mode priority in the second level  
of the CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an op-  
tion, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Focus  
(default)  
Photos can only be taken when in-focus indicator () is displayed.  
Release Photos can be taken whenever shutter-release button is pressed.  
174  
Custom Setting a3: Pattern Selection in Group Dynamic AF  
This option controls how focus areas are grouped  
in group dynamic-AF (  
75) and whether the  
camera gives priority to the subject in the center  
focus area of the selected group. Highlight a3  
Group dynamic AF in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Focus areas are grouped in pattern 1 ( 176). Camera focuses  
on subject in center focus area of selected group. Because camera  
does not have to select focus area, less time is required for focus  
operation. If subject moves out of center focus area, camera will  
focus based on information from other focus areas in same group.  
Center focus area of selected group is highlighted in top control  
panel.  
Pattern 1/  
Center area  
(default)  
Focus areas are grouped in pattern 1 ( 176). Camera automati-  
cally selects focus area containing subject closest to camera in cur-  
rent focus area group. If subject moves out of selected focus area,  
camera will focus based on information from other focus areas in  
same group.  
Pattern 1/  
Closest subject  
Pattern 2/  
As for Pattern 1/Center area, except that focus areas are  
Center area grouped in pattern 2 ( 176).  
Pattern 2/  
As for Pattern 1/Closest subject, except that focus areas are  
Closest subject grouped in pattern 2 ( 176).  
175  
Focus areas are grouped as follows (illustrations show the display in the top  
control panel):  
Pattern 1  
Pattern 2*  
Top  
Top  
Left Center1 Center2 Right  
Bottom  
Center  
area  
Left Center Right  
Bottom  
Top  
Top  
Left Center1 Center2 Right  
Bottom  
Closest  
subject  
Left Center Right  
Bottom  
*The center focus-area group is selected by pressing the center of the multi selector  
once to activate the current center focus-area group and then pressing the center of  
the multi selector to toggle between “center 1” and “center 2.” “Center 2” is only  
available when Center AF area (the default option) is selected for Center button  
(Custom Setting f1)>Shooting mode.  
176  
Custom Setting a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On  
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to  
sudden large changes in the distance to the sub-  
ject. Highlight a4 Lock-On in the second level  
of the CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Camera waits before adjusting focus when distance to subject  
changes abruptly. Prevents camera from refocusing when subject  
is briefly obscured by objects passing through frame.  
On  
(default)  
Camera immediately adjusts focus when distance to subject  
changes abruptly. Use when photographing series of subjects at  
varying distances in quick succession.  
Off  
Custom Setting a5: AF Activation  
This option controls whether both the shutter-  
release button and the AF-ON buttons can be  
used to initiate autofocus or whether autofocus  
is only initiated when one of the AF-ON buttons is  
pressed. Highlight a5 AF activation in the sec-  
ond level of the CSM menu ( 169) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Shutter/AF-ON Autofocus can be performed with AF-ON buttons or by pressing  
(default) shutter-release button halfway.  
AF-ON only Autofocus can only be performed using AF-ON buttons.  
Description  
177  
Custom Setting a6: Focus Area Illumination  
The options in this menu control when the focus  
areas are illuminated and for how long. Highlight  
a6 Focus area illum in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press the multi se-  
lector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Controls whether active focus area is displayed  
in manual focus mode. Press multi selector up  
or down to highlight option, press to right to  
select:  
Manual  
On (default): Active focus area displayed when  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
Off: Focus areas not displayed in manual fo-  
cus mode.  
focus mode  
Controls whether active focus area is displayed  
in CH (continuous high-speed) or CL (continu-  
ous low-speed) mode. Press multi selector up  
or down to highlight option, press to right to  
select:  
Continuous  
mode  
On (default): Active focus area displayed in  
continuous mode.  
Off: Focus areas not displayed in continuous mode.  
Determines how long active focus area is dis-  
played when selected. Press multi selector up  
or down to highlight option, press to right to  
select:  
0.2s (default): Active focus area displayed for  
0.2s.  
When  
selected  
1s: Active focus area displayed for 1s.  
178  
Custom Setting a7: Focus Area Select  
By default, the focus-area display is bounded by  
the four outer focus areas so that, for example,  
pressing the multi selector up when the top focus  
area is selected has no effect. Focus-area selection  
can be changed to “wrap around.” Highlight a7  
Focus area in the second level of the CSM menu  
(
169) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
No wrap  
(default)  
Wrap-around disabled.  
Focus-area selection “wraps around” from top to bottom, bottom to  
top, right to left, and left to right.  
Wrap  
Custom Setting a8: Vertical AF-ON Button Function  
This option determines what functions are as-  
signed to the AF-ON button for vertical shooting.  
Highlight a8 Vertical AF-ON in the second level  
of the CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
AF-ON+ Pressing vertical AF-ON button initiates autofocus. Focus area can be  
Focus area selected by pressing vertical AF-ON button and rotating sub-command  
(default) dial.  
AF-ON Pressing vertical AF-ON button initiates autofocus.  
AE/AF-L+ As for AF-ON+Focus area, except that pressing vertical AF-ON button  
Focus area locks focus and exposure.  
AE/AF-L Pressing vertical AF-ON button locks focus and exposure.  
Focus area can be selected by pressing vertical AF-ON button and rotat-  
ing sub-command dial. Button can not be used for other functions.  
Focus area  
179  
Custom Setting b1: ISO Auto Control  
If On is selected for this option, the camera will automatically adjust sensitiv-  
ity (ISO equivalency) when necessary to help ensure optimal exposure. This  
option is not available at sensitivities of HI-1 or HI-2.  
Highlight b1 ISO auto in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Off Sensitivity remains fixed at value selected by user, regardless of whether  
(default) optimal exposure can be achieved at current exposure settings.  
If optimal exposure can not be achieved at sensitivity selected by user, sen-  
sitivity is adjusted to compensate, to minimum approximately equivalent to  
ISO 200 and maximum approximately equivalent to ISO 1600. Sensitivity  
can not be set to HI-1 or HI-2 while this option is in effect. Sensitivity re-  
mains fixed at value selected by user when flash is used.  
On  
When On is selected, the rear control-panel dis-  
play shows ISO-AUTO and ISO-A appears in the  
viewfinder sidebar. These indicators flash when  
sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the  
user.  
Bank Select  
If a shooting menu bank in which ISO has been set to HI-1 or HI-2 is chosen after On  
is selected for Custom Setting b1, sensitivity (ISO equivalency) will not be adjusted  
automatically. Sensitivity will also not be adjusted automatically if a Custom Settings  
bank in which On is selected for Custom Setting b1 is chosen after ISO has been set  
to HI-1 or HI-2.  
High ISO NR ( 165)  
Noise is more likely to appear in photographs taken at higher sensitivities. To reduce  
noise at sensitivities of ISO 800 equivalent and above, turn on the High ISO NR option  
in the shooting menu.  
180  
Custom Setting b2: ISO Step Value  
This option determines whether adjustments to  
sensitivity (ISO equivalency) are made in incre-  
1
ments equivalent to 3 EV (1/3 step, the default  
option), ½EV (1/2 step), or 1EV (1 step). High-  
light b2 ISO step value in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting b3: EV Steps for Exposure Control  
This option determines whether adjustments to  
shutter speed, aperture, and bracketing are made  
1
in increments equivalent to 3 EV (1/3 step, the  
default option), ½EV (1/2 step), or 1EV (1 step).  
Highlight b3 EV step in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting b4: EV Steps for Exposure Compensation  
This option determines whether adjustments to  
exposure compensation are made in increments  
equivalent to 1 3 EV (1/3 step, the default option),  
½EV (1/2 step), or 1EV (1 step). Highlight b4  
Exposure comp. EV in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
181  
Custom Setting b5: Easy Exposure Compensation  
This option controls whether the  
button is needed to set exposure  
compensation ( 95). If On is selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure  
display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0.  
Highlight b5 Exposure comp. in the second level  
of the CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Off Exposure compensation set by pressing  
button and rotating main  
(default) command dial.  
Exposure compensation set by rotating command dial only. Dial used de-  
pends on option selected for Custom Setting f5> Change Main/Sub.  
Command dials (Custom Setting f5)>Change Main/Sub  
Off  
On  
On  
P
S
A
M
Sub-command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
N/A  
182  
Custom Setting b6: Center Weight Area  
When calculating exposure, center-weighted me-  
tering assigns the greatest weight to a circle in the  
center of the frame. The diameter (φ) of this circle  
can be selected from 6, 8, 10, and 13mm (the  
default option is 8mm; note that the diameter  
is fixed at 8mm when a non-CPU lens is used,  
regardless of the setting selected for Non-CPU lens data in the shooting  
menu). Highlight b6 Center weight in the second level of the CSM menu  
(
169) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting b7: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure  
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value  
selected by the camera. Exposure can be fine  
tuned separately for each metering method by  
1
from +1 to –1EV in steps of 6 EV. Highlight b7  
Fine tune exposure in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi selector  
to the right. A message will be displayed warning  
that the  
icon does not appear when exposure  
is altered; press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight Yes and press the multi selector to the  
right (select No to exit without altering exposure).  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight a  
metering method and press the multi selector to  
the right to display a list of exposure values. Press  
the multi selector up or down to highlight an op-  
tion, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Fine-Tuning Exposure  
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank. Note that  
as the exposure compensation icon ( ) is not displayed, the only way to determine  
whether exposure has been altered is to view the fine-tuning menu. Exposure com-  
pensation ( 95) is recommended in most situations.  
183  
Custom Setting c1: AE Lock Buttons  
This option determines what controls lock expo-  
sure. Highlight c1 AE Lock in the second level  
of the CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
AE-L/AF-L Button  
Exposure can only be locked by pressing AE-L/AF-L button.  
(default)  
Exposure can be locked by pressing AE-L/AF-L button or by  
pressing shutter-release button halfway.  
+Release Button  
Custom Setting c2: Assignment of AE-L/AF-L Button  
This option controls the behavior of the AE-L/AF-L  
button. Highlight c2 AE-L/AF-L in the second  
level of the CSM menu ( 169) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to  
the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
AE/AF Lock  
(default)  
Both focus and exposure lock while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
AE Lock only Exposure locks while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Focus is unaffected.  
Exposure locks when AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains locked  
until button is pressed again, shutter is released or exposure meters  
turn off.  
AE Lock  
hold/reset  
AE Lock  
hold  
Exposure locks when AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains locked  
until button is pressed again or exposure meters turn off.  
AF Lock  
AF-On  
Focus locks while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Exposure is unaffected.  
AE-L/AF-L button performs same function as AF-ON button.  
184  
Custom Setting c3: Auto Meter-off Delay  
This option controls how long the camera con-  
tinues to meter exposure when no operations are  
performed: 4s, 6s (the default option), 8s, or 16s  
or until the camera is turned off (No limit). High-  
light c3 Auto meter-off in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 169) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection. Choose a shorter meter-off delay for  
longer battery life.  
Custom Setting c4: Self-Timer Delay  
This option controls the length of the shutter-  
release delay in self-timer mode. Shutter-release  
can be delayed by approximately 2s, 5s, 10s (the  
default option), or 20s. Highlight c4 Self-timer  
in the second level of the CSM menu ( 169) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting c5: Monitor off Delay  
This option controls how long the monitor remains  
on when no operations are performed: 10s, 20s  
(the default option), 1 minute, 5 minutes, or 10  
minutes. Highlight c5 Monitor off in the second  
level of the CSM menu ( 169) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selec-  
tion. Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life.  
The EH-6 AC Adapter  
When the camera is powered by an optional EH-6 AC adapter, exposure meters will  
not turn off and the monitor will only power off after ten minutes, regardless of the  
options chosen for Custom Settings c3 (Auto meter-off) and c5 (Monitor off).  
185  
Custom Setting d1: CL-Mode Shooting Speed  
This option determines the rate at which photographs can be taken in CL  
(continuous low-speed) mode (during interval timer photography, this set-  
ting also determines the frame advance rate for single-frame and mirror-up  
modes). Shooting speed can be set to values between 1 and 7 frames per  
second (fps); the default value is 3fps. The frame advance rate may drop at  
slow shutter speeds.  
Highlight d1 Shooting speed in the second level  
of the CSM menu ( 170) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting d2: Max No. of Shots Taken in Continuous Shooting  
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in con-  
tinuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 50. Regardless of the  
setting chosen, the maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single  
burst can not exceed the following values:  
Image quality  
Compressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG  
Uncompressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG  
Compressed NEF (RAW)  
Uncompressed NEF (RAW)  
TIFF (RGB)  
Maximum number of shots per burst  
40  
50  
JPEG  
Highlight d2 Maximum shots in the second level  
of the CSM menu ( 170) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to choose the number of shots, then press  
to the right to make a selection.  
186  
Custom Setting d3: Exposure Delay Mode  
Shutter release can be delayed until about 0.4s  
after the shutter-release button is pressed, reduc-  
ing camera shake in situations in which the least  
camera movement could result in blurred photo-  
graphs (for example, microscope photography).  
Highlight d3 Exp. delay mode in the second  
level of the CSM menu ( 170) and press the multi selector to the right.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
(default)  
Shutter is released when shutter-release button is pressed.  
On  
Shutter is released about 0.4s after shutter-release button is pressed.  
187  
Custom Setting d4: File Number Sequence  
When a photograph is taken, the camera names  
the file new by adding one to the last file number  
used. This option controls whether file numbering  
continues from the last number used when a new  
folder is created, the memory card is formatted,  
or a new memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Highlight d4 File No. Seq. in the second level of the CSM menu ( 170) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Off File numbering reset to 0001 when new folder is created, memory card is  
(default) formatted or new memory card is inserted in camera.  
When new folder is created, memory card is formatted, or new memory  
card inserted in camera, file numbering continues from last number used or  
from largest number in current folder, whichever is higher. If photograph  
On  
is taken when current folder contains photograph numbered 9999, new  
folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again  
from 0001.  
As for On, except that next photograph taken is assigned file number by  
adding one to largest file number in current folder. If selected folder con-  
tains no photographs, file numbering reset to 0001.  
Reset  
Custom Setting d5: Control Panel/Viewfinder Display  
The options in this menu control the information  
displayed in the viewfinder and rear control panel.  
Highlight d5 Cntrl panel/finder in the second  
level of the CSM menu ( 170) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press the  
multi selector to the right.  
188  
Option  
Description  
Controls whether rear control panel shows sen-  
sitivity (ISO equivalency) or number of exposures  
remaining. Press multi selector up or down to  
highlight option, press to right to select:  
ISO (default): Rear panel shows sensitivity.  
Exposures remaining: Rear panel shows  
number of exposures remaining. Sensitivity  
displayed only while ISO button is pressed.  
Rear  
control  
panel  
Controls whether viewfinder shows frame count  
or number of exposures remaining (note that  
regardless of option selected, number of frames  
that can be stored in memory buffer will be  
shown while shutter-release button is pressed).  
Press multi selector up or down to highlight op-  
tion, press to right to select:  
Viewfinder  
display  
Frame count (default): Viewfinder shows frame count.  
Exposures remaining: Viewfinder shows number of exposures re-  
maining.  
Custom Setting d6: LCD Illumination  
This option controls the control panel backlights  
(LCD illuminators). Highlight d6 Illumination in  
the second level of the CSM menu ( 170) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Lamp on switch Control panels illuminate only while power switch is rotated to  
(default)  
position.  
Control panels illuminate whenever exposure meters are active  
(note that this increases drain on battery).  
Any button  
189  
Custom Setting e1: Flash Sync Speed Setting  
This option controls flash sync speed. Options  
range from ½50 s (1/250, the default setting) and  
1
60 s (1/60). To enable auto FP high-speed sync  
when using an SB-800 or SB-600 Speedlight,  
select 1/250 (Auto FP) (if an SB-800 or SB-600  
is not attached when this option is selected, flash  
sync speed will be set to ½50 s). When the camera shows a shutter speed of  
½50 s in exposure mode P or A, Auto FP High-Speed Sync will be activated if  
the actual shutter speed is faster than ½50 s.  
Highlight e1 Flash sync speed in the second level of the CSM menu ( 170)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting e2: Slowest Speed When Using Flash  
This option determines the slowest shutter speed  
possible when using a flash in programmed auto  
or aperture-priority auto exposure mode (in shut-  
ter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, shutter  
speeds can be set to values as slow as 30s regard-  
less of the setting chosen). Options range from  
1
60 s (1/60, the default setting) and 30s (30").  
Highlight e2 Flash shutter speed in the second level of the CSM menu (  
170) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit  
To x shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or manual expo-  
sure modes, select the shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30s or  
). An X will be displayed in the flash sync indicator in the top control panel.  
190  
Custom Setting e3: AA Flash Mode  
This option controls whether flash level is auto-  
matically adjusted for aperture when an external  
exposure meter is used with an SB-80DX or SB-  
28DX Speedlight (in the case of the SB-800, the  
flash mode chosen with the Speedlight is used  
regardless of the option chosen for Custom Set-  
ting e3). Highlight e3 AA flash mode in the second level of the CSM menu  
(
170) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
On  
Flash level automatically adjusted for aperture when external exposure me-  
(default) ter is used with SB-80DX or SB-28DX Speedlight (auto aperture).*  
Off Aperture specified manually using Speedlight controls (non-TTL auto).  
*To use auto aperture with non-CPU lenses, specify maximum aperture of lens using  
Non-CPU lens data option in shooting menu.  
Custom Setting e4: Preview Button Activates Modeling Flash  
This option determines whether the SB-800 and  
SB-600 emit a modeling flash when the depth-  
of-field preview button is pressed. Highlight e4  
Modeling flash in the second level of the CSM  
menu ( 170) and press the multi selector to the  
right. Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
light an option, then press to the right to make a  
selection.  
Option  
Description  
On  
(default)  
Modeling flash is emitted when depth-of-field is previewed ( 83).  
Off No modeling flash emitted when depth-of-field preview button is pressed.  
191  
Custom Setting e5: Auto Bracketing Set  
This option controls what settings are affected  
when auto bracketing is in effect. Highlight e5  
Auto BKT set in the second level of the CSM  
menu ( 170) and press the multi selector to  
the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
AE & flash  
(default)  
Camera performs exposure and flash-level bracketing.  
AE only  
Camera performs exposure bracketing only.  
Camera performs flash-level bracketing only.  
Flash only  
WB bracketing Camera performs white balance bracketing.  
White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or  
NEF+JPEG.  
192  
Custom Setting e6: Auto Bracketing in M Exposure Mode  
This option controls what settings are affected  
when AE & flash or AE only is selected for  
Custom Setting e5 in manual exposure mode.  
Highlight e6 Manual mode bkting in the sec-  
ond level of the CSM menu ( 170) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to  
the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Flash/speed Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e5 set to AE only) or  
(default)  
shutter speed and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & flash).  
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to  
AE only) or shutter speed, aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting  
e5 set to AE & flash).  
Flash/speed/  
aperture  
Flash/  
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to AE only) or aper-  
aperture ture and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & flash).  
Flash only Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & flash).  
• If no flash is attached when Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on, camera will vary  
sensitivity only, regardless of setting selected.  
• Flash bracketing performed only with i-TTL, D-TTL, or AA flash control.  
Custom Setting e7: Auto Bracketing Order  
This option controls the order in which bracketing  
is performed. Highlight e7 Auto BKT Order in  
the second level of the CSM menu ( 170) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
MTR>Under>Over Bracketing performed in order described in “Bracketing” (  
(default) 96).  
Under>MTR>Over Bracketing proceeds in order from lowest to highest value.  
Description  
193  
Custom Setting e8: Auto Bracketing Selection Method  
This option controls how the bracketing program  
is selected. Highlight e8 Auto BKT selection in  
the second level of the CSM menu ( 170) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Manual  
value select  
(default)  
Pressing  
button, rotate main command dial to select number of  
shots, sub-command dial to select bracketing increment.  
Press button and rotate main command dial to turn bracketing  
on and off. Press button and rotate sub-command dial to select  
number of shots and bracketing increment.  
Preset  
value select  
Custom Setting f1: Multi Selector Center Button  
This option determines what operations can be  
performed by pressing the center of the multi  
selector. Highlight f1 Center button in the sec-  
ond level of the CSM menu ( 170) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press the  
multi selector to the right.  
Shooting Mode  
This option controls what operation can be per-  
formed by pressing the center of the multi se-  
lector when the camera is in shooting mode.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
194  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Pressing center of multi selector selects center focus area or center  
focus-area group (group dynamic-AF). If Pattern 2 is selected for  
Custom Setting a3 (Group dynamic AF), center of multi selector  
can be used to toggle between center focus area groups.  
Center AF area  
(default)  
Illuminate AF Pressing center of multi selector illuminates active focus area or  
area  
focus-area group (group dynamic-AF) in viewfinder.*  
Pressing center of multi selector has no effect when camera is in  
shooting mode.*  
Not used  
*Center of multi selector can not be used to toggle between center focus-area groups  
when Pattern 2 is selected for Custom Setting a3 (Group dynamic AF).  
Playback Mode  
This option controls what operation is performed  
when the center of the multi selector is pressed  
in playback mode. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Thumbnail on/off Press center of multi selector to toggle between single-image  
(default)  
and thumbnail playback.  
Press center of multi selector to turn histogram display on and  
off.  
Histogram on/off  
Press center of multi selector to zoom  
in on image, press again to return to  
full-frame display or thumbnail play-  
back. When this option is selected,  
menu of zoom settings shown at right  
is displayed. Choose from Low magni-  
fication, Medium magnification, and  
High magnification.  
Zoom on/off  
195  
Custom Setting f2: When Multi Selector Is Pressed  
If desired, the multi selector can be used to ac-  
tivate the exposure meters or initiate autofocus.  
Highlight f2 Multi selector in the second level  
of the CSM menu ( 170) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Do nothing  
(default)  
Multi selector does not activate exposure meters or initiate  
autofocus.  
Reset mtr-off delay Pressing multi selector activates exposure meters.  
In AF-S or AF-C mode, pressing multi selector activates expo-  
sure meters. Camera focuses while multi selector is pressed.  
Initiate autofocus  
Custom Setting f3: Role of Multi Selector in Full-Frame Playback  
By default, pressing the multi selector up or down  
during playback displays the other images on the  
memory card, while pressing the multi selector  
left or right changes the photo information dis-  
played. These roles can be reversed using Custom  
Setting f3. Highlight f3 PhotoInfo/Playback in  
the second level of the CSM menu ( 170) and press the multi selector to  
the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
/PB▲▼  
Description  
Press multi selector up or down to display additional images, left or  
right to change photo info displayed.  
Info  
(default)  
Press multi selector up or down to change photo info displayed,  
left or right to display additional images.  
Info▲▼/PB  
196  
Custom Setting f4: Assign FUNC. Button  
This option controls the function performed by  
the FUNC. button. Highlight f4 FUNC. Button in  
the second level of the CSM menu ( 170) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
FV Lock If SB-800 or SB-600 Speedlight is attached, flash value locks when  
(default) FUNC. button is pressed. Press again to cancel FV lock.  
As above, except that when SB-800 or SB-600 is off or not attached,  
FUNC. button and command dials can be used to specify focal length  
and aperture of non-CPU lenses ( 121).  
FV Lock/  
Lens data  
1 step If FUNC. button is pressed when rotating command dials, changes to  
spd/  
shutter speed (exposure modes S and M) and aperture (exposure modes  
aperture A and M) are made in increments of 1EV.  
Same as  
AE-L/AF-L  
FUNC. button performs same functions as AE-L/AF-L button.  
Flash off Flash will not fire in photos taken while FUNC. button is pressed.  
While FUNC. button is pressed, all shots in exposure or flash bracketing  
program will be taken each time shutter-release button is pressed. In  
continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed modes, camera will  
repeat bracketing burst while shutter-release button is held down. If  
white-balance bracketing is selected, camera will take photos at up to  
Bracket-  
ing burst  
8fps (single or continuous high-speed mode) or 1–7fps (continuous low-  
speed mode) and perform white balance bracketing on each frame.  
Matrix  
metering  
Matrix metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.  
Center-  
weighted  
Center-weighted metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.  
Spot  
metering  
Spot metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.  
197  
Custom Setting f5: Customize Command Dials  
This option controls the operation of the main  
and sub-command dials. Highlight f5 Command  
dials in the second level of the CSM menu (  
170) and press the multi selector to the right.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an  
option, then press the multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Controls direction of command dials when setting  
flexible program, shutter speed, easy exposure  
compensation, exposure mode, exposure compen-  
sation value, bracketing increment, and flash sync  
mode. Press multi selector up or down to highlight  
option, press to right to select:  
Rotate  
direction  
Normal (default): Normal command dial operation.  
Reverse: Reverses rotation of command dials.  
Exchanges functions of main and sub-command  
dials when setting shutter speed and aperture.  
Press multi selector up or down to highlight op-  
tion, press to right to select:  
Off (default): Main command dial controls shut-  
ter speed, sub-command dial controls aperture.  
On: Main command dial controls aperture, sub-  
command dial controls shutter speed.  
Change  
Main/  
Sub  
Controls whether changes to aperture are made  
using lens aperture ring or command dials. Re-  
gardless of setting chosen, lens ring must be used  
to set aperture for non-CPU lenses, command dials  
to set aperture for type G lenses not equipped with  
aperture ring. Press multi selector up or down to  
highlight option, press to right to select:  
Aperture  
setting  
Sub-command dial (default): Aperture can only be adjusted with sub-  
command dial (or main command dial if Change Main/Sub is On).  
Aperture ring: Aperture can only be adjusted using lens aperture ring.  
Camera aperture display shows aperture in increments of 1EV. This op-  
tion is selected automatically when non-CPU lens is attached.  
198  
Option  
Description  
Controls functions performed by command dials  
during playback or when menus are displayed.  
Press multi selector up or down to highlight op-  
tion, press to right to select:  
Off (default): Multi selector used to choose  
picture displayed, highlight thumbnails, and navi-  
gate menus.  
On: Main command dial performs same function as pressing multi  
selector left or right. Sub-command dial performs same function as  
pressing multi selector up or down. Note that this option has no effect  
on the roles played by the command dials during playback zoom.  
Menus  
and  
Playback  
Single-image playback: main command dial is used to choose picture  
displayed, sub-command dial to display additional photo information.  
Thumbnail playback: main command dial moves cursor left or right,  
sub-command dial moves cursor up or down.  
Menu navigation: main command dial moves highlight bar up or  
down. Rotate sub-command dial to right to display sub-menu, to left  
to return to previous menu. To make selection, press multi selector to  
right, press center of multi selector, or press  
button.  
199  
Custom Setting f6: Setting Method for Buttons and Dials  
This option allows adjustments that are normally  
made by holding a button and rotating a com-  
mand dial to be made by rotating the command  
dial after the button is released. Highlight f6 But-  
tons and dials in the second level of the CSM  
menu ( 170) and press the multi selector to the  
right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press  
to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Default Changes to settings made by rotating command dial while button is held  
(default) down.  
Settings can be changed by rotating command dial after button is released.  
To exit, press button again, press shutter-release button halfway, press  
, ISO, QUAL, or WB button, or (except when No limit is selected  
for Custom Setting c3 or optional AC adapter is used) wait for about 20s.  
,
Hold  
,
,
Custom Setting f7: Disable Shutter If No CF Card  
This option can be used to enable the shutter  
release when no memory card is inserted in the  
camera. Note that when photographs are being  
captured to a computer using Nikon Capture 4  
Camera Control, photographs are not recorded to  
the camera memory card and the shutter release  
will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen  
for this option.  
Highlight f7 No CF card? in the second level of the CSM menu ( 170) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
On  
(default)  
Shutter-release button disabled when no memory card is inserted.  
Off Shutter-release button enabled even when no memory card is inserted.  
200  
The Setup Menu  
Camera Setup  
The setup menu contains three pages of options:  
Option  
Format  
202  
203  
LCD brightness  
Mirror Lock-up*  
203  
Video mode  
204  
World Time  
18  
Language  
17  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Voice memo  
205  
206  
140  
Voice memo overwrite  
Voice memo button  
Audio output  
141  
141  
143  
USB  
208  
Dust Off ref photo  
209–210  
211  
Battery Info  
Wireless LAN†  
Firmware Version  
211–219  
219  
*Available only when optional EH-6 AC adapter is con-  
nected.  
Available only when optional WT-2/2A or WT-1/1A  
wireless transmitter is connected.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
201  
Format  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use.  
Formatting memory cards is also an effective way  
of deleting all pictures on the card. To format  
a memory card, highlight Format in the setup  
menu ( 201) and press the multi selector to  
the right. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight one of the following options and then  
press the  
button:  
Option  
Description  
No Exit without formatting memory card.  
Format memory card. Message shown at right dis-  
played while formatting is in progress. Do not turn  
the camera off, remove the batteries or memory  
Yes  
card, or unplug the AC adapter (available sepa-  
rately) until formatting is complete and setup  
menu is displayed.  
During Formatting  
Do not remove the memory card, remove the battery, or unplug the AC adapt-  
er (available separately) while formatting is in progress.  
Before Formatting  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes all data they contain, including  
hidden and protected pictures and any other data that may be on the card.  
Before formatting, be sure to transfer to a computer any pictures you would like to  
keep.  
FAT 32  
The D2Hs supports FAT 32, allowing use of memory cards with capacities of over 2GB.  
FAT 16 is used when reformatting cards already formatted in FAT 16.  
Two-Button Format  
Memory cards can also be formatted with the  
(
and ) buttons ( 23).  
202  
LCD Brightness  
To adjust monitor brightness, highlight LCD  
brightness in the setup menu ( 201) and press  
the multi selector to the right. The menu shown  
at right will be displayed. Press the multi selector  
up to increase brightness, down to decrease. The  
number to the right of the display indicates the  
current brightness level, with +2 the brightest setting and –2 the darkest.  
Press the multi selector to the right to complete the operation and return to  
the setup menu.  
Mirror Lock-up  
This option is used to lock the mirror in the up  
position to allow inspection or cleaning of the  
low-pass filter that protects the image sensor.  
See “Technical Notes: Caring for the Camera”  
(
244). When an optional EH-6 AC adapter  
is connected, Mirror Lock-up will be available  
in the setup menu ( 201). Highlighting this option and pressing the multi  
selector to the right displays the menu shown above. If the multi selector is  
pressed to the right again, a row of dashes (“– – – – – – ”) will be displayed  
in the top control panel. To raise the mirror, press the shutter-release button.  
The mirror will be locked in the up position the row of dashes will blink. The  
mirror will be lowered when the camera is turned off.  
203  
Video Mode  
Before connecting your camera to a video device  
such as a television or VCR ( 222), choose a vid-  
eo mode setting that matches the video standard  
used in the device. Highlight Video mode in the  
setup menu ( 201) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
NTSC Use when connecting camera to NTSC devices.  
Use when connecting camera to PAL devices. Note that number of pixels in  
output is selectively reduced, causing drop in resolution.  
PAL  
World Time  
World Time is used to set the camera clock to  
the current date and time. See “First Steps: Step  
3—Basic setup” ( 17).  
Language  
Choose the language for camera menus and  
messages from  
(German), English, Español (Spanish), Français  
(French), (Korean), Italiano (Italian),  
(Chinese), Deutsch  
(Japanese), Nederlands (Dutch), and Svenska  
(Swedish). See “First Steps: Step 3—Basic setup”  
(
18).  
Video Mode  
The default video standard varies with the country or region of purchase.  
204  
Image Comment  
Using this option, brief texts comment can be  
added to photographs as they are taken. Com-  
ments can be viewed when the photographs are  
displayed using PictureProject or Nikon Capture 4  
version 4.2.1 or later. The first twelve letters of  
the comment are also visible on the fourth page  
of the photo information display ( 130).  
Highlight Image comment in the setup menu ( 201) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an op-  
tion, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.  
Input comment: The following dialog will be displayed. Enter a comment as  
described below.  
Keyboard area  
Comment area  
Use multi selector to high-  
Comment appears here.  
light letters, press center  
To move cursor, press  
button and use multi se-  
lector.  
of multi selector to select.  
To move the cursor in the comment area, press the  
button and use the  
multi selector. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the  
multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and  
press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the current  
cursor position, press the  
changing the comment, press the  
button. To return to the setup menu without  
button.  
Comments can be up to thirty-six characters long. Any characters after the  
thirty-sixth will be deleted.  
After editing the comment, press  
to return to the image comment menu.  
Attach comment: A comment is added to all photographs taken when this  
option is checked (). Highlight this option and press the multi selector to  
the right to toggle the check mark on or off.  
205  
Auto Image Rotation  
The D2Hs is equipped with a built-in sensor that detects camera orientation.  
Information from this sensor can be embedded in photographs as they are  
taken, allowing portrait (tall) orientation photos to be rotated automatically  
during playback or when the pictures are displayed in PictureProject or Nikon  
Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later.  
Highlight Auto image rotation in the setup  
menu ( 201) and press the multi selector to  
the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Camera records whether shots are in landscape (wide) orientation, portrait  
(tall) orientation with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, or portrait orienta-  
tion with the camera rotated 90° counter-clockwise.* If Yes is selected for  
Rotate tall during playback ( 157), portrait orientation photos will be  
displayed in portrait orientation in camera monitor.  
On  
(default)  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90°  
clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counter-clockwise  
Camera orientation not recorded. PictureProject and Nikon Capture 4 ver-  
sion 4.2 or later display all photographs in landscape (wide) orientation.  
Choose this option when taking pictures with lens pointing up or down.  
Off  
*In CH (continuous high speed) and CL (continuous low speed) modes ( 41), orienta-  
tion recorded for first shot applies to all images in same burst, even if camera orienta-  
tion is changed during shooting.  
206  
Voice Memo  
Voice memo contains options for recording voice  
memos in shooting mode. See “Voice Memos”  
(
140).  
Voice Memo Overwrite  
The option selected for Voice memo overwrite  
determines whether the voice memo for the last  
photograph recorded can be overwritten when  
the camera is in shooting mode. See “Voice  
Memos” ( 141).  
Voice Memo Button  
This option controls operation of the button.  
See “Voice Memos” ( 141).  
Audio Output  
This menu contains output options for voice  
memos. See “Voice Memos” ( 143).  
207  
USB  
Before connecting the camera to a computer via  
USB ( 223), select the appropriate USB option  
as determined by the computer operating system  
and whether the camera is being controlled from  
Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later (available  
via download to purchasers of Nikon Capture 4)  
or photographs are being transferred to the com-  
puter using PictureProject.  
PictureProject  
Nikon Capture 4  
Camera Control  
Operating system  
Transfer  
Windows XP Home Edition  
Windows XP Professional  
Choose PTP or  
Mass Storage  
Mac OS X  
Choose PTP  
Windows 2000 Professional  
Windows Millennium Edition (Me)  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)  
Choose  
Mass Storage  
Mac OS 9  
Not supported  
The default setting for USB is Mass Storage. To change the USB setting,  
highlight USB in the setup menu ( 201) and press the multi selector to the  
right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight the desired option,  
then press the multi selector to the right.  
208  
Dust Off Ref Photo  
This option is used to acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off function  
in Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later (available via download to purchas-  
ers of Nikon Capture 4; for more information, see the Nikon Capture 4 User’s  
Manual).  
Dust Off ref photo is only available when a CPU lens is mounted on  
1
2
the camera. We recommend using a lens with a focal length of at least  
50mm. If using a zoom lens, zoom in to the maximum telephoto posi-  
tion.  
Highlight Dust Off ref photo in the setup  
menu ( 201) and press the multi selector to  
the right. The menu shown at right will be  
displayed.  
Press the multi selector to the right. Camera  
settings will be adjusted automatically. The  
message shown at right will be displayed, and  
will be displayed in the viewfinder and  
control panels.  
3
Top control panel  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
To cancel the operation and return to the setup menu, press the  
but-  
ton or press the multi selector to the left. The operation will also be  
cancelled when the camera or monitor is turned off.  
Image Dust Off  
The Image Dust Off feature in Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later processes NEF  
(RAW) photographs to remove the effects of dust in the camera imaging system by  
comparing the images to the data acquired with Dust Off ref photo. It is not avail-  
able with TIFF (RGB) or JPEG images. The same reference data can be used for NEF  
(RAW) photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures.  
209  
With the lens ten centimeters (four inches)  
4
5
from a bright, featureless white object, frame  
the object so that nothing else is visible in  
the viewfinder and press the shutter-release  
button halfway. In autofocus mode, focus  
will automatically be set to infinity; in manual  
focus mode, set focus to infinity manually before pressing the shutter-  
release button. If using the aperture ring to set aperture, choose the  
minimum setting (largest f/-number).  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the  
way down to acquire Image Dust Off refer-  
ence data (note that noise reduction turns  
on automatically when the subject is poorly  
lit, increasing the amount of time needed to  
record the data). The monitor turns off when  
the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the reference object is too bright or too  
dark, the camera may be unable to acquire  
Image Dust Off reference data and the mes-  
sage shown at right will be displayed. Choose  
another reference object and repeat the pro-  
cess from Step 3.  
Image Dust Off Reference Data  
Image Dust Off reference data are recorded to the  
memory card at an image quality of JPEG Fine and an  
image size of Large. When the resulting image is played  
back on the camera, a grid pattern is displayed and  
voice memos can not be recorded. Files created with  
Dust Off ref photo can not be viewed using computer  
imaging software.  
210  
Battery Info  
To view information on the EN-EL4 rechargeable  
Li-ion battery currently inserted in the camera,  
highlight Battery Info in the setup menu ( 201)  
and press the multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Battery meter Current battery level expressed as a percentage ( 27).  
Number of times shutter has been released with current battery  
since battery was last charged. Note that camera may sometimes  
release shutter without recording photograph, for example when  
Picture meter  
measuring value for preset white balance.  
Required: due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is  
required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately;  
recalibrate battery before charging (see MH-21 Quick Charger  
instructions for details).  
Calibration  
Not required: calibration not required.  
Five-level display showing battery age. 0 (New) indicates that bat-  
tery performance has not been affected; 4 (Replace) indicates that  
battery has reached end of charging life and should be replaced.  
Charging life  
Wireless LAN  
This option is only available when an optional  
WT-2/2A or WT-1/1A wireless transmitter is at-  
tached. To adjust wireless LAN settings, highlight  
Wireless LAN in the setup menu ( 201) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option  
and then press the multi selector to the right. The  
options available vary depending on whether the  
WT-2/2A or WT-1/1A is attached. See the manual  
provided with the wireless transmitter for details.  
WT-2/2A  
WT-1/1A  
211  
Wireless LAN Options for the WT-2/2A  
Settings for the WT-2/2A differ depending on whether the transmitter is be-  
ing used to send data to an ftp server or to connect to a computer running  
Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control (available separately; Nikon Capture 4 ver-  
sion 4.2.1 or later required).  
Option  
FTP  
Camera Control  
Choose On  
Choose PTP/IP  
Required  
Wireless LAN system  
Choose On  
Choose FTP  
Required  
Required  
Required  
Not available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Mode  
Wireless  
Network  
settings  
TCP/IP  
FTP  
Required  
Not available  
Required  
Pairing options  
Auto send  
Not available  
Not available  
Not available  
Not available  
Not available  
Settings  
Delete after send?  
Send file as  
Send folder  
Deselect all?  
Settings for the WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A  
Even where the same options are available for both devices, wireless LAN settings must  
be adjusted separately for the WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A.  
USB  
When using a wireless transmitter, set the USB option in the camera setup menu to  
PTP ( 208).  
212  
Wireless LAN system  
Turn the WT-2/2A on or off. Press the multi se-  
lector up or down to highlight an option and then  
press the multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
(default)  
WT-2/2A off; wireless link unavailable.  
WT-2/2A off; wireless link available.  
On  
Mode  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
FTP or PTP/IP and then press the multi selector  
to the right.  
Option  
Description  
FTP  
(default)  
Use when connecting to ftp server.  
Use when controlling camera remotely. Re-  
quires Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later  
(available separately).  
PTP/IP  
Settings  
The settings menu contains the options listed  
below. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option and then press the multi se-  
lector to the right.  
Option  
Option  
Network settings 214  
Pairing options 214  
Send file as  
Send folder  
Deselect all?  
216  
216  
216  
Auto send  
215  
Delete after send? 215  
213  
Network settings: Adjust settings for connection  
to a wireless network. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option and then press the  
multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Wireless, TCP/IP, and FTP settings are stored in one of four banks  
(A, B, C, and D). Store settings for different networks in different  
banks and switch between them using this menu. Descriptive cap-  
tions can be added to bank names as described on page 160.  
Choose  
settings  
Load  
Load Wireless, TCP/IP, and FTP settings from camera memory  
settings file? card.  
Adjust SSID, ad hoc, encryption, and compatibility settings for con-  
nection to wireless network.  
Wireless  
TCP/IP  
FTP  
Adjust or view TCP/IP settings, including IP address, DNS, and gate-  
way settings.  
Enter password and user ID and adjust settings for connection to ftp  
server.  
Pairing options: Pair the camera with comput-  
ers running Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control  
(requires Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later,  
available separately). Once paired with the cam-  
era, the computer will automatically connect  
when Camera Control is started, allowing the  
camera to be controlled remotely from the computer. The camera can store  
up to ten pairs of connections (note that each computer can control only one  
camera at a time, and that each camera can be controlled by only one com-  
puter at a time). Before pairing the camera with a computer, adjust wireless  
network settings appropriately.  
214  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option and then press the  
multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Assign name to camera. Camera will be registered with computer  
under this name when pairing begins.  
Camera  
Edit  
Edit list of computers with which camera is paired. Computers can  
connection be deleted from list or pairing can be suspended by selecting Disable  
list (remember to enable pairing before reconnecting).  
Auto send: Choose whether to transmit photo-  
graphs to the server as they are taken. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option  
and then press the multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Off Photos are not transmitted automatically after shooting. Photos can be  
(default) selected for transmission in playback mode.  
On  
Photos transmitted to server automatically after recording.  
Delete after send?: Choose whether to delete  
photographs after transmission. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option and  
then press the multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
No  
(default)  
Photos are not deleted after transmission.  
Photos deleted after transmission. Regardless of setting selected for Cus-  
tom Setting d4 (File No. Seq.), file numbering continues from last number  
used when new folder is created or memory card inserted.  
Yes  
215  
Send file as: When sending images taken at set-  
tings of NEF+ JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal, or  
NEF+JPEG Basic, choose whether to send both  
NEF and JPEG files or only the JPEG files. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option  
and then press the multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
NEF(Raw)+JPEG  
Send both NEF and JPEG files.  
Send JPEG files only.  
(default)  
JPEG only  
Send folder: Entire folders can be selected for  
transmission to the server. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight a folder and then press  
the multi selector to the right to begin transmis-  
sion of the selected folder and all files it contains.  
Deselect all?: Remove “send,” “sending,” and  
“sent” marking from all images on the memory  
card. Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
light an option, then press the multi selector to  
the right.  
Option  
Description  
No  
Exit without removing “send,” “sending,” and “sent” marking.  
Yes Remove “send,” “sending,” and “sent” marking from all images.  
216  
Wireless LAN Options for the WT-1/1A  
The following options are available when the WT-1/1A is connected.  
Transceiver  
Turn the WT-1/1A transceiver on or off. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option  
and then press the multi selector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Off Transceiver off. Camera can not communi-  
(default) cate with server.  
Transceiver on. Camera can communicate  
with server.  
On  
Status  
Shows the current status of the link between the  
WT-1/1A and the server. Press the multi selector  
to the right to return to the wireless LAN menu.  
Option  
Description  
Status of server link.  
Status  
Link quality Five-level indicator of link quality.  
Signal level Five-level indicator of signal strength.  
Now sending Name of file currently being sent.  
Remaining Number of frames yet to be sent.  
Estimated time needed to send re-  
Time left  
maining data.  
Auto Send  
Choose whether to transmit photographs to the  
server as they are taken. See “Auto send” (  
215).  
217  
Delete After Send?  
Choose whether to delete photographs after  
transmission. See “Delete after send” ( 215).  
Send File As  
When sending images taken at settings of NEF+  
JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal, or NEF+JPEG  
Basic, choose whether to send both NEF and  
JPEG files or only the JPEG files. See “Send file  
as” ( 216).  
Send Folder  
Entire folders can be selected for transmission to  
the server. See “Send folder” ( 216).  
Deselect All?  
Remove “send,” “sending,” and “sent” marking  
from all images on the memory card. See “Dese-  
lect all” ( 216).  
Settings for the WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A  
Even where the same options are available for both devices, wireless LAN settings must  
be adjusted separately for the WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A.  
USB  
When using a wireless transmitter, set the USB option in the camera setup menu to  
PTP ( 208).  
218  
Network Settings  
Adjust network settings for connection to the  
server. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option and then press the multi se-  
lector to the right.  
Option  
Description  
Load  
Load Wireless, TCP/IP, and FTP set-  
settings file? tings from camera memory card.  
Adjust settings for connection to wire-  
less network.  
Wireless  
Adjust TCP/IP settings, including IP ad-  
dress, DNS, and gateway settings.  
TCP/IP  
Enter password and user ID and adjust  
settings for connection to ftp server  
FTP  
Firmware Version  
To display the current camera firmware version,  
highlight Firmware Version in the setup menu  
(
201) and press the multi selector to the right.  
Press the multi selector to the left to return to the  
setup menu.  
219  
220  
Connections  
Connecting to External Devices  
Photographs and camera menus can be displayed  
on a television screen or recorded to video tape.  
If the supplied software is installed, the camera  
can be connected to a computer and photo-  
graphs copied to disk for editing, viewing, print-  
ing, or long-term storage. When the camera is  
connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer,  
pictures can be printed directly from the camera.  
Television Playback  
Read this section for information on connecting  
the camera to a television or VCR.  
Connecting to a Computer  
This section describes how to connect the camera  
to a computer.  
Connecting to a Printer  
Read this section for information on connecting  
the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer.  
221  
Television Playback  
Connecting the Camera to a Video Device  
The supplied EG-D2 audio/video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the  
D2Hs to a television or VCR for playback or recording.  
Turn the camera off.  
1
The EG-D2  
Turn the camera off before connecting or dis-  
connecting the EG-D2.  
Open the cover protecting the A/V-out and  
DC-in connectors.  
A/V out  
DC in  
2
3
Connect the EG-D2. Insert the black plug to the camera A/V-out connec-  
tor. Connect the yellow plug to the video-in jack on the television or VCR  
and the white plug to the audio-in jack.  
Connect to  
video device  
Connect to  
camera  
Tune the television to the video channel.  
4
5
Turn the camera on. During playback, images will be displayed on the  
television screen or recorded to video tape; the camera monitor will re-  
main off. Note that the television may not be able to display the entire  
image when pictures are played back.  
Use an AC Adapter  
Use of an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended play-  
back. When the EH-6 is connected, the camera monitor-off delay will be fixed at ten  
minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically.  
Video Mode ( 204)  
Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device. Note  
that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device.  
Audio Output ( 143)  
Set Via VIDEO OUT to play back or record voice memos on the video device.  
222  
Connecting to a Computer  
Data Transfer and Camera Control  
The supplied UC-E4 USB cable can be used to connect the camera to a com-  
puter. Once the camera is connected, PictureProject can be used to copy  
photographs to the computer, where they can be browsed, viewed, and  
retouched. The camera can also be used with Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1  
or later (available via download to purchasers of Nikon Capture 4), which  
supports batch processing and more advanced image editing options and  
can be used to control the camera directly from the computer.  
Before Connecting the Camera  
Install the necessary software after reading the manuals and reviewing the  
system requirements. To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure  
the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use  
or use an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately).  
Before connecting the camera, set the USB option  
in the setup menu ( 208) according to the com-  
puter operating system and whether the camera  
is being controlled from Nikon Capture 4 version  
4.2.1 or later or photographs are being trans-  
ferred to the computer using PictureProject:  
PictureProject  
Transfer  
Nikon Capture 4  
Camera Control  
Operating system  
Windows XP Home Edition  
Windows XP Professional  
Choose PTP or  
Mass Storage  
Mac OS X  
Choose PTP  
Windows 2000 Professional  
Windows Millennium Edition (Me)  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)  
Choose  
Mass Storage*  
Mac OS 9  
Not supported  
*Do NOT select PTP. If PTP is selected when the camera is connected, the Windows  
hardware wizard will be displayed. Click Cancel to exit the wizard, and then discon-  
nect the camera. Be sure to select Mass storage before reconnecting the camera.  
223  
Connecting the USB Cable  
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.  
1
2
Turn the camera off.  
Connect the UC-E4 USB cable as shown. Connect the camera directly to  
3
the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard.  
IN  
A
/V  
O
U
T
DC  
IN  
Turn the camera on. If Mass Storage is  
selected for USB, will be displayed in  
the rear control panel and viewfinder. The  
aperture display in the top control panel will  
4
also show  
, and the PC mode indicator will  
flash (if PTP is selected, the camera displays  
will only change when Nikon Capture 4 Cam-  
era Control is running). Photographs can be  
transferred to the computer as described in  
the PictureProject Reference Manual (on CD).  
If Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control is running,  
the top control panel will show  
in place  
of the number of exposures remaining. Any  
photographs taken will be recorded to the  
computer hard disk rather than the camera memory card. See the Nikon  
Capture 4 User’s Manual for more information.  
Do Not Turn the Camera Off  
Do not turn the camera off while transfer is in progress.  
224  
Disconnecting the Camera  
If PTP is selected for USB ( 208), the camera can be turned off and the  
USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete. If the USB option in the  
camera setup menu is still at its default setting of Mass storage, the camera  
must first be removed from the system as described below.  
Windows XP Home Edition/Windows XP Professional  
Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon ( ) in  
the taskbar and select Safely remove USB Mass  
Storage Device from the menu that appears.  
Windows 2000 Professional  
Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon ( ) in  
the taskbar and select Stop USB Mass Storage  
Device from the menu that appears.  
Windows Millennium Edition (Me)  
Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon ( ) in  
the taskbar and select Stop USB Disk from the  
menu that appears.  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)  
In My Computer, click with the right mouse but-  
ton on the removable disk corresponding to the  
camera and select Eject from the menu that ap-  
pears.  
Macintosh  
Drag the camera volume (“NIKON D2HS”) into  
the Trash.  
225  
Connecting to a Printer  
Printing Photographs  
When the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer via the  
supplied UC-E4 USB cable, selected JPEG images can be printed directly  
from the camera. Before connecting the printer, confirm that it supports  
PictBridge. If possible, connect the camera to an EH-6 AC adapter (available  
separately) to reduce the drain on the battery.  
Set the USB option in the setup menu (  
1
208) to PTP (photographs can not be printed  
at the default setting of Mass Storage).  
Turn the printer on.  
Turn the camera off.  
2
3
Connect the UC-E4 USB cable as shown. Connect the camera directly to  
4
the printer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub.  
IN  
A
/V  
O
U
T
DC  
IN  
Taking Pictures for Direct Printing  
When taking photographs to be printed without modification, set Color mode to  
I (sRGB) or III (sRGB) ( 67).  
Print Times  
Larger images require more time to print.  
226  
Turn the camera on. A welcome screen will  
be displayed in the monitor, followed by a  
PictBridge menu.  
5
6
Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
light Setup and press the multi selector to  
the right. The menu shown at right will be  
displayed; press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press the multi  
selector to the right to make the selection.  
Option  
Description  
Done  
Save changes and return to PictBridge menu.  
Choose page size. Press multi selector  
up or down to highlight Default (default  
size for current printer), 3.5"x5", 5"x7",  
Postcard, 100mmx150mm, 4"x6",  
8"x10", Letter, A3, or A4, then press to  
right to select.  
Page size  
Imprint date Check to print date of recording on each picture.  
Check to print pictures without white border (some printers will  
ignore this option).  
No border  
To select photographs for printing or create an index print of all JPEG  
images on the memory card, highlight Print in the PictBridge menu and  
press the multi selector to the right ( 228–229). To print the print or-  
der created with the playback Print set option ( 153), highlight Print  
(DPOF) and press the multi selector to the right ( 230).  
7
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
227  
Printing Selected Photographs  
To print selected photos, highlight Print in the PictBridge menu and press the  
multi selector to the right. The menu shown in Step 1 will be displayed.  
1
2
Highlight Choose folder.  
Display list of folders.  
3
4
Highlight folder.*  
Return to print menu.  
*To display photos in all folders, highlight All. To make selection from one folder only,  
highlight folder name.  
5
6
Highlight Print select.†  
Display photos in current folder.  
To create index print listing all JPEG images in current folder as small thumbnail im-  
ages, highlight Index print and press multi selector to right (do not select Default  
for Page size when creating index prints). Photos in current folder will be displayed,  
with JPEG images marked by icon. Press to begin printing. To interrupt printing  
and exit to PictBridge menu, press button again.  
Selecting Photographs for Printing  
NEF (RAW) and TIFF (RGB) images are not displayed in the Print select menu and can  
not be selected.  
228  
Scroll through photos. Current photo  
shown at bottom of display.  
7
8
Select photo and set number of prints  
to 1. Selected photos are marked by  
icon. Press  
button and press multi  
selector up or down to specify number  
of prints (up to 99).‡  
If printer supports cropping, photo can be cropped  
for printing by pressing button. Dialog shown at  
right will be displayed; rotate main command dial to  
zoom in or out and use multi selector to scroll to other  
areas of image (note that prints may become slightly  
“grainy” when highly enlarged). When desired area is  
framed in monitor, press  
button to return to print  
selection dialog. Only selected portion of photo will  
be included when image is printed.  
Repeat steps 7 and 8 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture,  
highlight and press center of multi selector. To exit to PictBridge menu  
without printing, press button.  
9
Begin printing. To cancel and return  
to PictBridge menu before all images  
10  
have been printed, press  
button  
again. Turn camera off and disconnect  
USB cable when printing is complete.  
229  
Printing the Current Print Order  
To print the current print order, highlight Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge  
menu and press the multi selector to the right. This option is only available if  
a print order is present on the memory card.  
View photos in current folder. Pictures  
in print order are indicated by  
icon  
1
2
and number of prints; print order can  
be changed as described on page 154.  
To exit to PictBridge menu without  
printing, press button.  
Begin printing. To cancel and return  
to PictBridge menu before all images  
have been printed, press  
again. Turn camera off and disconnect  
USB cable when printing is complete.  
button  
“Data Imprint”/“Imprint Date”  
Selecting Print (DPOF) resets the Data imprint and Imprint date options for the  
current print order ( 154). To print the date of recording on photographs, select  
Imprint date in the PictBridge Setup menu.  
Error Messages  
If the dialog shown at right is displayed, an error has  
occurred. After checking the printer and resolving any  
problems as directed in the printer manual, press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight Continue and  
press the multi selector to the right to resume printing.  
Select Cancel to exit without printing the remaining  
images.  
Print Set ( 153)  
To create a DPOF print order before printing, use the Print set option in the playback  
menu.  
230  
Technical  
Notes  
Camera Care, Options, and Resources  
This chapter covers the following topics:  
Optional Accessories  
A list of the lenses and other accessories available  
for the D2Hs.  
Caring for the Camera  
Information on storage and maintenance.  
Troubleshooting  
A list of the error messages displayed by your  
camera and how to deal with them.  
Specifications  
Principal specifications for the D2Hs.  
231  
Optional Accessories  
Lenses and Other Accessories  
Lenses for the D2Hs  
The D2Hs is compatible with a variety of AF Nikkor lenses for 35-mm film  
cameras, including wide-angle, telephoto, zoom, micro, defocus image con-  
trol (DC), and regular lenses with focal lengths of 14–600mm ( 234). Note  
that IX Nikkor CPU lenses can not be used with the D2Hs.  
The lenses that can be used with the D2Hs are listed below.  
Camera setting  
Focus  
mode  
Exposure  
mode  
Metering  
system  
M (with  
electronic  
range finder)  
S
C
P
S
A
M
M
Lens/accessory  
Type G or D AF Nikkor2  
3D Color  
3
AF-S, AF-I Nikkor  
PC-Micro Nikkor 85mm f/2.8D4  
AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter7  
5
6
3
3
8
8
Other AF Nikkor (except lenses  
for F3AF)  
9
9
3
3
10  
AI-P Nikkor  
AI-,AI-S, or Series E Nikkor12  
AI modified Nikkor  
10  
13  
14  
15  
16  
13  
17  
13  
13  
Medical Nikkor 120mm f/4  
Reflex Nikkor  
15  
5
PC-Nikkor  
AI-type Teleconverter 18  
8
14  
15  
8
8
14  
15  
TC-16A AF Teleconverter  
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attach-  
ment19  
8
20  
13  
Auto extension rings (PK-series  
11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)  
8
1 IX-Nikkor lenses can not be used.  
6 Manual exposure mode only.  
2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.  
3 Spot metering meters selected focus area.  
4 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not  
work properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an  
aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.  
7 Compatible with AF-I Nikkor lenses and with all AF-S lenses except  
DX 12–24mm f/4G ED, 17–35mm f/2.8D ED, DX 17–55mm f/2.8G  
ED, 24–85mm f/3.5–4.5G ED, VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED, and  
28–70mm f/2.8D ED.  
8 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
5 Electronic range finder can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
9
When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm  
232  
f/2.8S, AF 35–70mm f/2.8S, new AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5S, or AF  
28–85mm f/3.5–4.5S lens at maximum zoom, in-focus indicator  
may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in  
focus. Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus.  
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
16 Can be used at in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower  
than 1/125s. If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU  
lens data option in shooting menu, aperture value will be displayed  
in viewfinder and top control panel.  
17 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-prior-  
ity auto exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring be-  
fore performing AE lock or shifting lens. In manual exposure mode,  
preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure  
before shifting lens.  
11 Some lenses can not be used (see below).  
12 Range of rotation for Ai 80–200mm f/2.8S ED tripod mount limited  
by camera body. Filters can not be exchanged whileAi 200–400mm  
f/4S ED is mounted on camera.  
13 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data option  
in shooting menu, aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and  
top control panel.  
14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are  
specified using Non-CPU lens data option in shooting menu. Use  
spot or center-weighted metering if desired results are not achieved.  
15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum  
aperture using Non-CPU lens data option in shooting menu.  
18 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm  
f/3.5–4.5S, AI 35–105mm f/3.5–4.5S, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5S,  
or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See teleconverter manual for details.  
19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be  
required depending on camera orientation.  
20 Use preset aperture. In manual exposure mode, set aperture us-  
ing focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking  
photograph.  
PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.  
Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D2Hs:  
• Non-AI lenses  
• Lenses for the F3AF (80mm f/2.8,  
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focus- 200mm f/3.5, TC-16 Teleconverter)  
ing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, • PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or  
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)  
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm • PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–  
earlier)  
f/5.6)  
906200)  
• 21mm f/4 (old type)  
• K2 rings  
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
• 1000mm f/6.3 Reflex (old type)  
• ED 180–600mm f/8 (serial numbers • 1000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers  
174041–174180) 142361–143000)  
• ED 360–1200mm f/11 (serial numbers • 2000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers  
174031–174127)  
200111–200310)  
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers  
280001–300490)  
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
If lens data are specified using the Non-CPU lens data option in the shooting menu,  
many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non-CPU lenses.  
If lens data are not specified, color matrix metering can not be used, and center-  
weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected.  
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes A and M, when aperture must be  
set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum aperture has not been specified using  
Non-CPU lens data, the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from  
maximum aperture; the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring.  
Aperture-priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and S. The  
exposure-mode indicator in the top control panel will blink, and A will be displayed in  
the viewfinder.  
233  
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts. Type G lenses  
are marked with a “G” on the lens barrel, type D lenses with a “D.”  
CPU lens  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring. Unlike other CPU  
lenses, there is no need to lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture  
setting (maximum f/-number) when using a type G lens.  
Picture Angle and Focal Length  
The diagonal picture angle of the D2Hs is less than that of a 35-mm camera.  
When calculating the focal length of the lenses for the D2Hs in 35-mm for-  
mat, multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1.5:  
Approximate focal length (mm) in 35-mm format  
Picture angle  
35-mm film camera  
D2Hs  
(modified for picture angle)  
17  
20  
30  
24  
36  
28  
42  
35  
50  
75  
60  
85  
25.5  
52.5  
90 127.5  
35-mm film camera  
D2Hs  
105  
135  
180  
200  
300  
300  
450  
400  
600  
500  
750  
600  
900  
157.5 202.5 270  
Calculating Picture Angle  
Picture size (35-mm format)  
The size of the area exposed by a 35-mm cam-  
era is 36×24mm. The size of the area exposed  
by the D2Hs, in contrast, is 23.3×15.5mm.  
As a result, the picture angle of photographs  
taken with the D2Hs differs from the picture  
angle for 35-mm cameras, even when the fo-  
cal length of the lens and the distance to the  
subject are the same.  
(36 mm × 24 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Lens  
Picture size (D2Hs)  
(23.3 mm × 15.5 mm)  
Picture angle (35-mm format)  
Picture angle (D2Hs)  
234  
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D2Hs.  
Contact your retailer or local Nikon representative for details.  
Batteries/  
Chargers/  
AC adapters  
EN-EL4 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: Additional EN-EL4 batteries are  
available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives.  
MH-21 Quick Charger: The MH-21 can be used to recharge and  
calibrate EN-EL4 batteries. It can fully recharge an exhausted EN-EL4  
battery in about 100 minutes.  
EH-6 AC Adapter: The EH-6 can be used with AC power sources of  
50–60Hz and 100–120V or 200–240V. Separate power cables are  
available for use in North America, the United Kingdom, continental  
Europe, Australia, and Japan.  
Wireless  
LAN  
adapters  
and  
WT-2/2A and WT-1/1A Wireless Transmitters: These wireless transmit-  
ters are mounted on the bottom of the camera and connect via a USB  
cable. Power is supplied from the camera. The WT-2/2A supports  
IEEE 802.11g for high-speed wireless transmission, and can be used  
in combination with Nikon Capture 4 version 4.2.1 or later (avail-  
able separately) to control the camera remotely with Nikon Capture  
4 Camera Control. Both models support IEEE 802.11b and can be  
used to upload photographs to an ftp server over a wireless network.  
See pages 211–219 for more information.  
antennas  
WA-E1 Extended RangeAntenna: Extends line-of-sight range of WT-2/2A  
and WT-1/1A to a maximum of about 150m (outdoors, 1Mbps)  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Your Nikon D2Hs digital camera is designed to the highest standards and includes  
complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery  
chargers, batteries, and AC adapters) certified by Nikon specifically for use with your  
Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and  
safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.  
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR  
NIKON WARRANTY. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not approved by  
Nikon could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries  
overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact your local authorized  
Nikon dealer.  
235  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
Focusing Screens: The following focusing screens are available for the  
D2Hs:  
accessories  
Type B  
III  
A type B BriteView III focusing screen  
is inserted in the camera at shipment.  
The type E clear-matte III focusing  
screen is etched with a grid, making  
it suitable for copying and architec-  
tural photography. Best results are  
achieved with PC-Nikkor lenses.  
Type E  
III  
DG-2 Magnifier: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the  
viewfinder. Use for close-up photography, copying, telephoto lenses,  
and other tasks that call for added precision. DK-7 eyepiece adapter  
(available separately) required.  
DK-14 and DK-17A Antifog Finder Eyepieces: These viewfinder eye-  
pieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions. The DK-17A is  
equipped with a safety lock.  
DK-19 Rubber Eyepiece Cup: The DK-19 makes the image in the view-  
finder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.  
Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses: To accommodate individual  
differences in vision, viewfinder lenses are available with diopters  
of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2m–1. The DK-17C is equipped with a safety  
lock.  
DR-5 Right-Angle Magnifying Viewing Attachment/DR-4 Right-Angle  
Viewing Attachment: The DR-4 and DR-5 attach to the viewfinder  
eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be  
viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting  
position. The DR-5 can also magnify the view through the viewfinder  
by 2× for greater precision when framing (note that the edges of the  
frame will not be visible when the view is magnified).  
DK-7 Eyepiece Adapter: The DK-7 is used when attaching the DG-2  
Magnifier or DR-3 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment to the D2Hs.  
236  
Filters  
Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-in, drop-in, and rear-  
interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters manufactured by other makers  
may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding.  
• The D2Hs can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL  
circular polarizing filter instead.  
• The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens.  
When using an R60 filter, set exposure compensation to +1.  
To prevent moiré, use of a filter is not recommended when the sub-  
ject is framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is  
in the frame.  
• Color matrix and 3D color matrix metering may not produce the de-  
sired results when used with filters with an exposure factor (filter fac-  
tor) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4S,  
ND4, ND8S, ND8, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). We recommend  
center-weighted metering. For details, see the manual provided with  
the filter.  
Optional  
Speedlights  
SB-800: This high-performance Speedlight has a Guide Number of  
53/174 (m/ft, 35-mm zoom head position, ISO 200; GN at ISO 100  
is 38/125) and supports i-TTL, TTL, auto aperture (AA), non-TTL auto  
(A), manual, and repeating flash control. Flash sync mode, includ-  
ing slow and rear-curtain sync, can be set from the camera. When  
used with the D2Hs, the SB-800 supports Auto FP High-Speed Sync  
for sync speeds faster than ½50 s (repeating flash mode excluded),  
Flash Color Information Communication for optimal white balance,  
FV Lock for recomposing photos without changing flash level, and  
Advanced Wireless Lighting with support for i-TTL, auto aperture,  
manual, and repeating flash control. The built-in AF-assist illumi-  
nator can be used with all of the D2Hss eleven focus areas. For  
bounce-flash or close-up photography, the flash head can be rotated  
through 90° above and 7° below the horizontal, 180° left, and 90°  
right, while soft lighting can be achieved with the supplied SW-10H  
bounce adapter. Auto power zoom (24–105mm) ensures that the  
illuminating is adjusted in accord with lens focal length. The built-in  
wide panel can be used for illuminating angles of 14mm and 17mm.  
An illuminator is included to assist in adjusting settings in the dark.  
The SB-800 accepts four AA batteries (five AA batteries when pow-  
ered by the supplied SD-800 battery pack) or SD-6, SD-7, or SD-8A  
power sources (available separately; see the Speedlight manual for  
details). Custom settings are available for fine-tuning all aspects of  
flash operation.  
237  
Optional  
Speedlights  
(continued)  
SB-600: This high performance Speedlight has a Guide Number of  
42/138 (m/ft, 35-mm zoom head position, ISO 200; GN at ISO 100  
is 30/98) and supports i-TTL, TTL, and manual flash control. Flash  
sync mode, including slow and rear-curtain sync, can be set from the  
camera. When used with the D2Hs, the SB-600 supports Auto FP  
High-Speed Sync for sync speeds faster than ½50 s, Flash Color Infor-  
mation Communication for optimal white balance, and FV Lock for  
recomposing photos without changing flash level. With an SB-800  
acting as a master flash, Advanced Wireless Lighting allows the SB-  
600 to serve as a remote slave flash in i-TTL and manual flash control  
modes. The built-in AF-assist illuminator can be used with all of the  
D2Hss eleven focus areas. For bounce-flash or close-up photogra-  
phy, the flash head can be rotated through 90° above the horizontal,  
180° left, and 90° right. Auto power zoom (24–85mm) ensures  
that the illuminating is adjusted in accord with lens focal length. The  
built-in wide panel can be used for an illuminating angle of 14mm.  
An illuminator is included to assist in adjusting settings in the dark.  
The SB-600 accepts four AA batteries (see the Speedlight manual for  
details). Custom settings are available for fine-tuning all aspects of  
flash operation.  
PC card  
EC-AD1 PC Card Adapter: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows Type I  
adapters  
CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots.  
Software  
Nikon Capture 4: Nikon Capture 4 can be used to capture photos to  
a computer and to edit and save RAW images in other formats. The  
D2Hs requires ersion 4.2.1, which is available to purchasers of Nikon  
Capture 4 via download from the websites listed on page 1 of this  
manual.  
238  
Remote  
The D2Hs is equipped with a ten-pin remote  
terminal terminal for remote control and automatic  
accessories photography. The terminal is provided with  
a cap, which protects the contacts when the  
terminal is not in use. The following acces-  
sories can be used:  
Accessory  
Description  
Length*  
MC-21  
Extension Cord  
3m  
(9´10˝)  
Can be connected to MC-series 20, 22, 25, or 30.  
Remote shutter release with blue, yellow, and black termi-  
nals for connection to a remote shutter-triggering device,  
allowing control via sound or electronic signals.  
MC-22  
Remote Cord  
1m  
(3´3˝)  
MC-23  
Connecting  
Cord  
40cm  
(1´4˝)  
Connects two cameras for simultaneous operation.  
Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for connection to devices  
with two-pin terminals, including the MW-2 radio control  
set, MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2 modulite control set.  
MC-25  
Adapter Cord  
20cm  
(8˝)  
MC-30  
Remote shutter release; can be used to reduce camera 80cm  
Remote Cord shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure.  
(2´7˝)  
MC-35 GPS Connects GPS devices to D2Hs via PC cable supplied by  
Adapter Cord manufacturer of GPS device ( 130).  
ML-3 Modulite  
Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8m  
Remote  
Control Set  
(26´).  
*
All figures are approximate.  
239  
Approved Memory Cards  
The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D2Hs:  
SDCFB  
SDCFB (Type II)  
SDCF2B (Type II)  
SDCFH (Ultra)  
SDCFH (Ultra II)  
SDCFX (Extreme III)  
4× USB  
128MB, 160MB, 192MB, 256MB, 384MB, 512MB, 1GB  
300MB  
256MB  
SanDisk  
128MB, 192MB, 256MB, 384MB, 512MB  
256MB, 512MB, 1GB  
1GB, 2GB  
128MB, 256MB, 512MB  
160MB  
10× USB  
12× USB  
16× USB  
24× USB  
128MB, 192MB, 256MB, 512MB  
256MB, 320MB, 512MB, 640MB, 1GB  
256MB  
Lexar  
Media  
16× WA USB  
40× WA USB  
80× WA  
128MB, 256MB, 512MB  
256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB, 4GB  
512MB, 1GB, 2GB, 4GB  
340MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB, 4GB  
Microdrive  
Operation is not guaranteed with other makes of card. For more details on  
the above cards, please contact the manufacturer.  
Memory Cards  
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory  
cards from the camera.  
• Format memory cards before first use or after data have been written to or deleted  
from the card by a device other than the camera.  
Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove  
memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the  
power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied  
to a computer. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in  
damage to the camera or card.  
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-  
age the card.  
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
240  
Caring for the Camera  
Storage and Maintenance  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, replace the mon-  
itor cover, remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with  
the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a  
dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor  
moth balls or in locations that:  
• are poorly ventilated or subject to over 60% humidity  
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as  
televisions or radios  
• are exposed to temperatures above 50°C/122°F (for example, near a  
space heater or in a closed vehicle on a hot day) or below –10°C (14°F)  
See “Caring for the Camera and Battery” ( iv–v) for more information.  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust, dirt, or sand then wipe gently with a soft,  
dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any  
sand or salt with a dry cloth lightly dampened with fresh water, then dry  
thoroughly. The camera may be damaged if foreign matter gets inside  
the camera body. Nikon cannot accept liability for damage caused by  
dirt or sand.  
Camera  
body  
These elements are made of glass and are easily damaged. Remove  
dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can  
vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and  
other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and  
clean with care.  
Lens,  
mirror, and  
viewfinder  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and  
other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather.  
Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.  
Monitor  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry  
cloth. Do not use alcohol or lens cleaning solutions.  
Ambient  
light sensor  
The Monitor  
Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass  
and to prevent liquid crystal from entering your eyes and mouth.  
The Control Panel  
Rarely, static electricity may cause the control panel to brighten or darken. This does  
not indicate a malfunction; the display will shortly return to normal.  
241  
Replacing the Focusing Screen  
A type B BriteView III focusing screen is inserted in the camera at shipment.  
To insert an optional type E clear-matte III focusing screen ( 236):  
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
1
Using the tweezers supplied with the focusing  
2
3
4
5
screen, pull the focusing screen latch towards  
you. The screen holder will spring open.  
Remove the existing screen, using the sup-  
plied tweezers and being careful to handle the  
screen by the tab to avoid scratches.  
Using the tweezers and handling the screen  
by the tab, set the replacement screen in the  
holder.  
Push the front edge of holder upward until it  
clicks into place.  
Replacing Focusing Screens  
Do not touch the surface of the mirror or focusing screens.  
Focusing Screens  
Use only screens designated for use in the D2Hs or D2H.  
242  
Replacing the Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about  
four years. If the  
exposure meters are on, the battery is running low and needs to be replaced.  
When the battery is exhausted, the icon will blink while the exposure  
icon is displayed in the top control panel while the  
meters are on. Photographs can still be taken but will not be stamped with  
the correct time and date, and interval timer photography will not function  
correctly. Replace the battery as described below.  
The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main battery  
1
2
3
4
chamber. Turn the camera off and remove the EN-EL4 battery.  
Slide the clock battery chamber cover toward  
the front of the main battery chamber.  
CR 1616  
3V  
Remove the clock battery.  
Insert new CR1616 lithium battery so that the  
positive side (the side marked with “+” and  
CR 1616  
3V  
the battery name) is visible.  
Slide the clock battery chamber cover towards  
CR 1616  
3V  
5
the back of the main battery chamber until it  
clicks into place.  
Reinsert the EN-EL4.  
6
7
Set the camera to the current date and time.  
Until the date and time have been set, the  
icon will flash in the top control panel.  
CAUTION  
Use only CR1616 lithium batteries. Using another type of battery could cause an ex-  
plosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed.  
Inserting the Clock Battery  
Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation. Inserting the battery incorrectly  
could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could damage the camera.  
243  
The Low-Pass Filter  
The image sensor that acts as the cameras picture element is fitted with a  
low-pass filter to prevent moiré. Although this filter prevents foreign objects  
from adhering directly to the image sensor, under certain conditions dirt or  
dust on the filter may appear in photographs. If you suspect that dirt or dust  
inside the camera is affecting your photographs, you can check for the pres-  
ence of foreign objects on the low-pass filter as described below.  
Turn the camera off and connect an EH-6 AC adapter (available sepa-  
1
rately). If you do not have access to an EH-6 AC adapter, take the cam-  
era to a Nikon-authorized service center.  
Remove the lens and turn the camera on.  
2
3
Press the button and select Mirror lock-up  
from the setup menu ( 198). The message  
shown at right will be displayed.  
Press the multi selector to the right. The mes-  
sage shown at right will be displayed in the  
camera monitor, and a row of dashes will be  
displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.  
To return to normal operation without raising  
the mirror, turn the camera off. Mirror lock-  
up will also be cancelled if the monitor is al-  
lowed to turn off automatically.  
4
Press the shutter-release button all the way  
down. The mirror will be raised and the shut-  
ter curtain will open, revealing the low-pass  
filter, and the row of dashes in the control  
panel will blink. The displays in the viewfinder  
and rear control panel will turn off.  
5
244  
Holding the camera so that light falls on the  
low-pass filter, examine the filter for dust or  
lint. If there are foreign objects on the filter,  
the filter requires cleaning. See the following  
section.  
6
7
Turn the camera off. The mirror will return to the down position and the  
shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap and disconnect  
the AC adapter.  
Cleaning the Low-Pass Filter  
The low-pass filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon recom-  
mends that filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
Should you choose to clean the filter yourself, follow the steps below.  
Raise the mirror as described in steps 1–5 on the preceding page.  
1
2
Remove dust and lint from the filter with a  
blower. Do not use a blower-brush, as the  
bristles could damage the filter. Dirt that can  
not be removed with a blower can only be re-  
moved by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
Under no circumstances should you touch or  
wipe the filter.  
Turn the camera off. The mirror will return to the down position and the  
shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap and disconnect  
the AC adapter.  
3
Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The D2Hs is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that  
the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once  
every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that  
fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recom-  
mended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the  
camera, such as lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the camera  
is inspected or serviced.  
245  
Troubleshooting  
Understanding Error Messages and Displays  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the view-  
finder, control panel, and monitor when there is a problem with the camera.  
Consult the list below before contacting your retailer or Nikon representa-  
tive.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
Lens aperture ring is not set to Set ring to minimum aperture  
20  
27  
27  
27  
(blinks)  
minimum aperture.  
Low battery.  
(largest f/-number).  
Ready a fully-charged spare  
battery.  
Battery exhausted.  
Replace battery.  
(blinks) (blinks)  
(blinks) (blinks)  
Contact Nikon-authorized ser-  
vice representative.  
Battery can not be used.  
No lens attached, or non-  
CPU lens attached without  
specifying maximum aperture.  
Aperture shown in stops from  
maximum aperture.  
Aperture value will be dis-  
played if maximum aperture 123  
is specified.  
Camera unable to focus using  
(blinks) autofocus.  
Focus manually.  
81  
50  
• Choose a lower sensitivity  
(ISO equivalency)  
• Use optional ND filter  
• In exposure mode:  
S Increase shutter speed  
A Choose a smaller aperture  
(larger f/-number)  
237  
Subject too bright; photo will  
be overexposed.  
86  
88  
• Choose a higher sensitivity  
(ISO equivalency)  
50  
• Use optional Speedlight  
• In exposure mode:  
S Lower shutter speed  
A Choose a larger aperture  
(smaller f/-number)  
104  
Subject too dark; photo will be  
underexposed.  
86  
88  
246  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
selected in shutter-pri- Change shutter speed or se-  
86,  
90  
(blinks)  
(blinks)  
ority auto.  
lect manual exposure mode.  
Speedlight that does not  
support D-TTL flash control  
attached and set to TTL.  
Change flash mode setting on  
optional Speedlight.  
108  
Speedlight that does not  
support red-eye reduction at-  
tached and flash sync mode  
set to red-eye reduction.  
Change flash sync mode or  
use Speedlight that supports  
red-eye reduction.  
108–  
110  
(blinks)  
If indicator blinks for 3s after Check photo in monitor; if  
flash fires, photo may be un- underexposed, adjust settings  
114  
2
(blinks)  
(blinks)  
derexposed.  
and try again.  
Release shutter. If error per-  
sists or appears frequently,  
consult with Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
Camera malfunction.  
Memory insufficient to record  
further photos at current set-  
tings, or camera has run out of  
file or folder numbers.  
• Reduce quality or size.  
• Delete photographs.  
• Insert new memory card.  
43  
146  
22  
(blinks)  
(blinks)  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
Turn camera off and con-  
firm that card is correctly  
inserted.  
NO CARD  
PRESENT  
Camera cannot detect  
memory card.  
22  
CARD IS NOT  
FORMATTED  
Memory card has not been  
formatted for use in D2Hs.  
23,  
202  
Format memory card.  
247  
Indicator  
Control  
Monitor  
panel  
Problem  
Solution  
• Error accessing memory • Use Nikon-approved card. 240  
card.  
• Check that contacts are  
clean. If card is damaged,  
contact retailer or Nikon  
representative.  
2
THIS CARD  
CANNOT BE  
USED  
(blinks)  
• Unable to create new • Delete files or insert new 22,  
folder.  
memory card.  
146  
23,  
• Card has not been for- • Format memory card.  
matted for use in D2Hs.  
202  
No images on memory Select folder containing im-  
card or folder(s) selected ages from Playback folder  
for playback contain no menu or insert different  
FOLDER  
CONTAINS  
NO IMAGES  
22,  
148  
images.  
memory card.  
No images can be played  
back until another folder  
has been selected or Hide  
image used to allow at  
least one image to be dis-  
played.  
ALL IMAGES  
HIDDEN  
All photos in current folder  
are hidden.  
148,  
151  
FILE DOES  
NOT  
CONTAIN  
IMAGE DATA  
File has been created or  
modified using a computer  
or different make of cam-  
era, or file is corrupt.  
23,  
146,  
202  
Delete file or reformat  
memory card.  
A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras  
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the control panel and  
the camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a  
strong external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery,  
and turn the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately),  
disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. In the event  
of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon representative. Note that  
disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not  
recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded  
to the card will not be affected.  
248  
Specifications  
Type  
Single-lens reflex digital camera with interchangeable lenses  
Effective pixels  
4.1 million  
Image sensor  
Image size (pixels)  
23.3×15.5 mm; total pixels: 4.26 million  
2464×1632 (large), 1840×1224 (medium)  
Lens mount  
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)  
Compatible lenses*  
Type G or D AF Nikkor All functions supported  
Micro Nikkor 85mm  
F2.8D  
All functions supported except autofocus and some exposure  
modes  
Other AF Nikkor†  
All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering and  
3D multi-sensor balanced fill-flash for digital SLR  
All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering, 3D  
multi-sensor balanced fill-flash for digital SLR, and autofocus  
Can be used in exposure modes A and M; electronic range  
finder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster;  
color matrix metering, multi-sensor balanced fill-flash for digi-  
tal SLR, and aperture value display supported if user provides  
lens data  
AI-P Nikkor  
Non-CPU  
*
IX Nikkor lenses can not be used  
Excluding lenses for F3AF  
Picture angle  
Equivalent in 35-mm format is approximately 1.5 times lens  
focal length  
Viewfinder  
Diopter adjustment  
Eyepoint  
Optical fixed eye-level pentaprism  
3+1m–1  
19.9mm (–1.0m–1)  
Focusing screen  
Frame coverage  
Magnification  
Type B BriteView clear-matte Mark III screen provided  
Approximately 100% of lens (vertical and horizontal)  
Approximately 0.86× (50-mm lens at infinity; –1.0m–1)  
Reflex mirror  
Quick return  
Lens aperture  
Focus-area selection  
Lens servo  
Instant return with depth-of-field preview  
Single area or group can be selected from 11 focus areas  
Instant single-servo AF (S); continuous-servo AF (C); manual  
(M); predictive focus tracking automatically activated accord-  
ing to subject status in single- and continuous-servo AF  
249  
Autofocus  
TTL phase detection by Nikon Multi-CAM2000 autofocus  
module  
Detection range  
(ISO 100 at 20°C/68°F)  
1+19EV (0+19EV for focus areas at left and right edges  
of frame)  
AF-area mode  
Single-area AF, dynamic-area AF, group dynamic-AF, dynamic-  
area AF with closest subject priority  
Focus lock  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button half-  
way (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button  
Exposure  
Metering  
Matrix  
Three-mode through-the-lens (TTL) exposure metering  
3D color matrix metering supported with type G and D lenses;  
color matrix metering available with other CPU lenses and  
with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data  
Center-weighted  
Spot  
Weight of 75% given to 6, 8, 10, or 13-mm circle in center of  
frame, or weighting based on average of entire frame  
Meters 3-mm circle (about 2% of frame) centered on selected  
focus area (on center focus area when non-CPU lens is used)  
Range  
(ISO 100 equivalent,  
f/1.4 lens, 20°C/68°F)  
0–20EV (3D color matrix or center-weighted metering)  
2–20EV (spot metering)  
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI  
Exposure control  
Exposure modes  
Programmed auto with flexible program; shutter-priority  
auto; aperture priority auto; manual  
Exposure compensation 5+5EV in increments of 1/3, ½, or 1EV  
Bracketing  
Exposure and/or flash bracketing (2–9 exposures in incre-  
ments of 1/3, ½, 2/3, or 1EV)  
Exposure lock  
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button  
Shutter  
Speed  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter  
301/8000 s in steps of 1/3, ½, or 1EV, bulb  
Sensitivity  
2001600 in steps of 1/3, ½, or 1EV, 3200, 6400; auto gain  
(ISO equivalent)  
to 1600  
White balance  
Auto (TTL white-balance with main image sensor, 1,005 pix-  
els RGB sensor, and ambient light sensor), six manual modes  
with fine-tuning, color temperature setting  
Bracketing  
2–9 exposures in increments of 1, 2, or 3  
250  
Flash  
Sync contact  
Flash control  
TTL  
X-contact only; flash synchronization at up to ½50 s  
TTL flash control by combined five-segment TTL multi sensor  
with single-component IC and 1,005-pixel AE sensor  
SB-800, 600: i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR and stan-  
dard i-TTL flash for digital SLR  
SB-80DX, 28DX, or 50DX with type G or D lens: 3D multi-sen-  
sor balanced-fill flash for digital SLR  
SB-80DX, 28DX, or 50DX with other lens: multi-sensor bal-  
anced-fill flash for digital SLR  
SB-80DX, 28DX, or 50DX with spot metering: standard TTL  
flash for digital SLR  
Auto aperture  
Non-TTL auto  
Available with SB-800, 80DX, or 28DX and CPU lens  
Available with such Speedlights as SB-800, 28, 27, and 22s  
Range-priority manual Available with SB-800  
Sync modes Front curtain sync (normal), slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-  
eye reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync  
Flash-ready indicator Lights when SB-series Speedlight such as 800, 600, 80DX,  
28DX, 50DX, 28, 27, or 22s is fully charged; blinks for 3s  
after flash is fired at full output  
Accessory shoe  
Creative Lighting  
System  
Standard ISO hot-shoe contact with safety lock  
With SB-800 and 600, supports Advanced Wireless Lighting  
(SB-600 only supports AWL when used as remote flash), Auto  
FP High-Speed Sync, Flash Color Information Communica-  
tion, modeling illumination, and FV Lock  
Storage  
Media  
File system  
Type I and II CompactFlash memory cards; Microdrives  
Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF)  
and Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
Compression  
Compressed 12-bit NEF (RAW): approximately 50–60%  
JPEG: JPEG baseline-compliant, can be selected from Fixed  
size and Optimal quality  
Self-timer  
Electronically controlled timer with 220s duration  
Depth-of-field preview Lens aperture stopped down when depth-of-field preview  
button is pressed  
Monitor  
2.5˝, 232,000-dot, low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with  
brightness adjustment  
251  
Video output  
External interface  
Tripod socket  
Firmware  
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL  
USB 2.0  
¼˝ (ISO)  
User upgradeable  
Supported languages Chinese (Simplified), Dutch, English, French, German, Italian,  
Japanese, Korean, Spanish, Swedish  
Power source  
• One 11.1V EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion battery  
• EH-6 AC adapter (available separately)  
Dimensions (W×H×D) Approximately 157.5×149.5×85.5mm (6.2˝×5.9˝×3.4˝)  
Weight  
Approximately 1070g (2lb 6oz) without battery, memory  
card, body cap, or monitor cover  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0–40°C (32104°F)  
Humidity  
Less than 85% (no condensation)  
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery  
operating at an ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F).  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software  
described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held  
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
252  
Battery Life  
The number of shots that can be taken with an EN-EL4 battery varies with the con-  
dition of the battery, temperature, and how the camera is used.  
Case 1  
At room temperature (20°C/68°F), approximately 2900 shots can be taken with a  
fully-charged (1900mAh) EN-EL4 battery and an AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G IF ED lens  
(VR off) under the following standard Nikon test conditions: continuous high-speed  
shooting mode; continuous-servo autofocus; image quality set to JPEG Normal; image  
size set to Large; shutter speed ½50 s; shutter-release pressed halfway for three seconds  
and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times with each shot; after six  
shots, monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once  
exposure meters have turned off.  
Case 2  
At room temperature (20°C/68°F), approximately 800 shots can be taken with a fully-  
charged (1900mAh) EN-EL4 battery and an AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF ED lens  
(VR off) under the following standard Nikon test conditions: single-frame shooting  
mode; continuous-servo autofocus; image quality set to JPEG Normal; image size set  
to Large; shutter speed ½50 s; shutter-release pressed halfway for six seconds and focus  
cycled from infinity to minimum range once with each shot; after each shot, monitor  
turned on for two seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once exposure meters  
have turned off.  
The following can reduce battery life:  
• Using the monitor  
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
• Repeated autofocus operations  
Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs  
• Slow shutter speeds  
• Using optional WT-2/2A or WT-1/1A wireless transmitters  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL4 batteries:  
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.  
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left un-  
used.  
253  
Index  
Menus  
PLAYBACK MENU, 146–157  
Delete, 146–147  
b1: ISO auto, 180  
b2: ISO step value, 181  
b3: EV step, 181  
b4: Exposure comp. EV,  
181  
b5: Exposure comp., 182  
b6: Center weight, 183  
b7: Fine-tune exposure,  
183  
Language, 17  
Image comment, 205  
Auto image rotation, 206  
Voice memo, 140  
Voice memo overwrite, 141  
Voice memo button, 141  
Audio output, 143  
USB, 208  
Dust Off ref photo,  
209–210  
Battery info, 211  
Playback folder, 148  
Slide show, 149–150  
Hide image, 151–152  
Print set, 153–155  
Display mode, 156  
Image review, 156  
After delete, 157  
Rotate tall, 157  
c1: AE Lock, 184  
c2: AE-L/AF-L, 184  
c3: Auto meter-off, 185  
c4: Self-timer, 185  
c5: Monitor off, 185  
d1: Shooting speed, 186  
d2: Maximum shots, 186  
d3: Exp. delay mode, 187  
d4: File No. Seq., 188  
d5: Cntrl panel/finder,  
188–189  
d6: Illumination, 189  
e1: Flash sync speed, 190  
e2: Flash shutter speed,  
190  
e3: AA flash mode, 191  
e4: Modeling flash, 191  
e5: Auto BKT set, 192  
e6: Manual mode bkting,  
193  
e7: Auto BKT Order, 193  
e8: Auto BKT selection,  
194  
f1: Center button, 194–195  
f2: Multi selector, 196  
f3: Photo Info/Playback,  
196  
f4: FUNC. button, 197  
f5: Command dials,  
198–199  
f6: Buttons and dials, 200  
f7: No CF card?, 200  
SET UP, 201–219  
SHOOTING MENU, 158–167  
Shooting menu bank,  
159–160  
Wireless LAN, 211–219  
Firmware version, 219  
Symbols  
3D color matrix metering II.  
See Metering  
3D Multi Sensor Balanced Fill-  
Flash for Digital SLR, 106  
Reset shooting menu, 161  
Active folder, 162  
File Naming, 163  
Image quality, 43–44  
Image size, 46–47  
JPEG compression, 45  
Raw compression, 46  
White bal., 52–64  
Long exp. NR, 165  
High ISO NR, 165  
ISO, 50–51  
Image sharpening, 65  
Tone compensation, 66  
Color mode, 67  
Hue adjustment, 69  
Intvl timer shooting,  
115–119  
A
Advanced Wireless Lighting, 107  
AF-area mode, 74  
Aperture, 83–92  
adjusting, 88  
lock, 92  
maximum, 82, 89, 91, 105,  
106, 121  
minimum, 20, 83  
non-CPU lenses and, 121  
value display, 7, 11  
Ambient light sensor, 52, 57  
Auto meter off, 185  
Autoexposure lock, 93  
Autofocus, 74  
continuous-servo, 70  
focus tracking, 71  
single-area AF, 74  
single-servo, 70  
Non-CPU lens data,  
121–124  
CSM MENU, 168–200  
C: Bank select, 171  
R: Menu reset, 172–173  
a1: AF-C mode priority,  
174  
a2: AF-S mode priority,  
174  
a3: Group dynamic AF,  
175–176  
a4: Lock-On, 177  
a5: AF activation, 177  
a6: Focus area illum, 178  
a7: Focus area, 179  
a8: Vertical AF-ON, 179  
Auto FP high-speed sync,  
107, 239  
A/V OUT, 4, 222  
B
Backlight, control panel, 3  
BASIC. See Image quality  
Battery,  
inserting, 16  
life, 253  
Format, 202  
LCD brightness, 203  
Mirror lock-up, 203  
Video mode, 204  
World Time, 18  
storage, v  
254  
Blur, reducing, 33, 50–51,  
86. See also Exposure delay  
mode; Mirror-up mode  
single-frame playback, 35,  
136  
Depth-of-field preview, 83  
type E clear matte III, 236  
Folders, 148, 162, 188, 228  
FV lock, 112, 197  
Bulb. See Long time exposures Design rule for Camera File  
G
Bracketing, 96–103. See also  
Exposure bracketing; White  
balance, bracketing  
system, 148  
Digital Print Order Format,  
153  
GPS, 125  
data, 130  
Group dynamic-AF. See AF-  
area mode  
Brightness. See Monitor, bright-  
ness of  
Diopter, 31, 236  
DPOF. See Digital Print Order  
Format  
H
C
HI-1/HI-2, 50–51  
Highlight display, 131, 156  
Histogram, 130, 156  
RGB, 131, 156  
D-TTL flash control, 106  
C. See Autofocus, continu-  
ous-servo  
E
CH. See Shooting mode  
CL. See Shooting mode  
Clock-calendar, 19  
Closest subject priority. See  
AF-area mode  
Color profile. See SHOOT-  
ING MENU, Color mode  
Color space. See SHOOT-  
ING MENU, Color mode  
Electronic analog exposure  
display, 91  
I
Electronic range finder, 81  
Exif version 2.21, 155  
Exposure bracketing, 96  
Exposure compensation, 95  
Exposure delay mode, 187  
Exposure meters, 82. See also  
Auto meter off  
Illuminator. See Backlight,  
control panel  
Image dust off, 209–210  
Image files, 45, 48–49, 188  
Image sensor, 244, 249  
Image size, 46–47  
Image quality, 43–46  
ISO. See Sensitivity  
ISO auto, 180  
Color temperature. See White Exposure mode, 83–91  
balance  
aperture-priority auto, 88–89  
CompactFlash. See Memory  
card  
Computer, 222–223  
Continuous shooting mode,  
41, 186  
Contrast. See SHOOTING  
MENU, Tone compensation  
CPU lenses, 20, 232–236  
Creative Lighting System, 104  
Custom Settings, 168  
defaults, 172  
manual, 90–91  
programmed auto, 84–85  
shutter-priority auto, 86–87  
i-TTL flash control, 105  
J
JPEG, 43–45  
F
L
FINE. See Image quality  
Flash, 104–114. See also  
Speedlight  
bracketing, 96  
Flash Color Information Com-  
munication, 52  
Flash-ready indicator, 114  
Flash sync mode, 110  
Flexible program, 85. See  
also Exposure mode, pro-  
grammed auto  
L. See Image size  
Lens, 20–21, 232–234  
attaching, 20  
compatible, 232–233  
CPU, 20, 232–234  
non-CPU, 232–233  
type D, 20, 232, 234  
type G, 20, 232, 234  
Long time-exposures, 90  
Low-pass filter, 244–245  
menu banks, 171  
CSM. See CSM MENU;  
Custom Settings  
D
M
Daylight saving time, 18  
DCF version 2.0. See Design  
rule for Camera File system  
Deleting, 35, 136, 146–147.  
See also Memory card,  
formatting  
Focal plane mark, 3, 81  
Focus. See autofocus; focus  
mode; manual focus  
Focus area (focus brackets),  
10, 72–77  
M. See Exposure mode, man-  
ual; Manual focus; Image size  
M
anual focus, 81  
Memory buffer, 41–42, 48  
Memory card, 22–24  
approved, 240  
capacity of, 48–49  
formatting, 23, 202  
Focus lock, 78  
all images, 147  
playback menu, 146  
selected images, 147  
Focus mode, 70–71  
Focusing screen, 236, 242  
type B BriteView III, 236  
255  
Metering, 82  
S
W
3D color matrix, 82  
center-weighted, 82  
color matrix, 82  
S. See Autofocus, single-ser-  
vo; Exposure mode, shutter-  
priority auto; Shooting mode  
Self-portraits. See Self-timer  
Self-timer, 120, 185  
Sensitivity, 50–51. See also  
SHOOTING MENU, ISO  
Sequential file numbering, 188  
Setup menu, 201–219  
Shutter speed, 83–92  
and flash synchronization,  
109, 190  
Shooting menu, 158–167  
banks, 159–160  
Shooting mode, 41–42  
Single-frame. See Shooting  
mode  
White balance, 52–64  
bracketing, 101–103  
color temperature, 56  
fine-tuning, 54–55  
preset, 57–64  
spot, 82  
Microdrive. See memory card  
Mirror up. See Shooting  
mode  
Monitor, 5, 241  
auto off, 185  
brightness of, 203  
cover, 28  
Monitor pre-flashes, 105,  
106, 112  
Multi Sensor Balanced Fill-  
Flash for Digital SLR, 106  
M-UP. See Shooting mode  
Wireless networks, 212–219  
N
Single-frame playback, 35,  
128–131  
NEF, 43–48  
Nikon Capture 4, 43–48, 209  
Noise, 43, 223–224, 238  
reduction, 165  
high sensitivities, 51  
slow shutter speeds, 90  
NORMAL. See Image quality  
Size. See Image size  
Speedlight, 104–114,  
190–191, 237–238. See also  
flash compatible, 107–109  
sRGB. See SHOOTING  
MENU, Color mode  
Standard TTL Flash for Digital  
SLR, 106  
P
PictBridge. See Printing  
photographs  
PictureProject, 43, 223–224  
Picture Transfer Protocol. See  
PTP  
Photo information, 129–131  
Playback, 35, 128  
Playback menu, 146–157  
PRE. See White balance,  
preset  
Predictive focus tracking, 71  
Printing photographs,  
226–230. See also Digital  
Print Order Format  
Protecting images, 135  
PTP, 208, 223, 226  
T
Television, 222  
TIFF-RGB. See Image quality  
Time. See  
SET UP, World  
Time  
Time exposures. See Long  
time-exposures  
Time zone. See  
SET UP,  
World Time  
Thumbnail playback, 132–133  
Two-button reset, 126  
U
USB, 208, 223, 226. See also  
computer  
R
V
RAW, 43–48, 209. See also  
Image quality; NEF  
Recent Settings, 39  
Red-eye reduction, 108–111  
Video device, 204, 222  
Viewfinder, 10, 31  
focus. See Diopter  
256  
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in  
whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical  
articles or reviews), may be made without written  
authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.  
Printed in Japan  
SB5E00200201(11)  
6MBA3511--  

Rinnai EPA 09 0001 User Manual
Planar Systems Car Video System PT1701M (U) User Manual
Panasonic AJ HDC27A User Manual
Olympus CAMEDIA C 5500 User Manual
MotoSAT Car Satellite TV System 901NOMAD 2IM User Manual
Metra Electronics AW 512CR User Manual
MB QUART FSB216 User Manual
Lanzar Car Audio VIBE 1800D User Manual
KitchenAid KSB560 User Manual
JVC GZ MG30U User Manual